[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025069702A1 - Flow path substrate, cartridge, detection system, and method for manufacturing flow path substrate - Google Patents

Flow path substrate, cartridge, detection system, and method for manufacturing flow path substrate Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025069702A1
WO2025069702A1 PCT/JP2024/027310 JP2024027310W WO2025069702A1 WO 2025069702 A1 WO2025069702 A1 WO 2025069702A1 JP 2024027310 W JP2024027310 W JP 2024027310W WO 2025069702 A1 WO2025069702 A1 WO 2025069702A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
flow path
reagent
flow
substrate according
flow paths
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/JP2024/027310
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
将也 中村
勝将 藤木
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Kyocera Corp
Original Assignee
Kyocera Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from PCT/JP2023/035641 external-priority patent/WO2025069377A1/en
Application filed by Kyocera Corp filed Critical Kyocera Corp
Publication of WO2025069702A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025069702A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N35/00Automatic analysis not limited to methods or materials provided for in any single one of groups G01N1/00 - G01N33/00; Handling materials therefor
    • G01N35/08Automatic analysis not limited to methods or materials provided for in any single one of groups G01N1/00 - G01N33/00; Handling materials therefor using a stream of discrete samples flowing along a tube system, e.g. flow injection analysis
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N37/00Details not covered by any other group of this subclass

Definitions

  • This disclosure relates to flow path substrates, etc.
  • the microchannel chip of Patent Document 1 has one liquid inlet, multiple reaction sections in which chemicals that react with the liquid are placed, multiple distribution sections that communicate with the liquid inlet, and flow channels that communicate with each distribution section and each reaction section.
  • the method for manufacturing a flow path substrate includes a forming step of forming a liquid receiving portion for receiving a liquid and a flow path connected to the liquid receiving portion on a substrate, a first disposing step of disposing a first reagent containing a primer in the flow path, and a second disposing step of disposing a second reagent containing an enzyme for amplifying nucleic acid in a position different from the first region of the flow path.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a detection system according to the present disclosure.
  • 1A and 1B are schematic diagrams showing an example of a configuration of a cartridge of the present disclosure, and schematic diagrams showing a window portion of the cartridge of the present disclosure as viewed from above.
  • 1A to 1C are schematic diagrams for explaining examples of use of the cartridge and detection device of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a detection system of the present disclosure.
  • 1 is a plan view illustrating an example of a flow path substrate of a cartridge according to the present disclosure.
  • 3 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a first region and a second region arranged in a flow channel provided in a flow channel substrate according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a detection system according to the present disclosure.
  • 1A and 1B are schematic diagrams showing an example of a configuration of a cartridge of the present disclosure, and schematic diagrams showing
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a method for manufacturing a flow channel substrate according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 5A to 5C are schematic diagrams showing an example of a method of applying a reagent to a flow channel provided in the flow channel substrate according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 1A and 1B are schematic plan views showing an example of a flow channel to which a reagent is applied, and schematic views showing another example of a method of applying the reagent to the flow channel.
  • FIG. 11 is a plan view showing an example of a flow path substrate according to a second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 13 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the arrangement of detection reagents in a flow channel provided in a flow channel substrate according to a second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 13A to 13C are schematic diagrams for explaining examples of use of a plurality of flow channels provided in a flow channel substrate according to a second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a manufacturing method of a flow path substrate 4B according to a second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a flow path substrate according to a third embodiment.
  • 15 is a cross-sectional view of the flow path substrate according to the third embodiment taken along a plane including line AA in FIG. 14.
  • 16 is a partial enlarged view of a flow channel substrate according to a third embodiment, in a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 15 .
  • FIG. 17 is a partial enlarged view of a flow path substrate according to a fourth embodiment, in a region corresponding to FIG. 16 .
  • 17 is a partial enlarged view of a flow path substrate according to a fifth embodiment, in a region corresponding to FIG. 16 .
  • 17 is a partial enlarged view of a flow path substrate according to a sixth embodiment, in a region corresponding to FIG. 16 .
  • 17 is a partial enlarged view of a flow path substrate according to a seventh embodiment, in a region corresponding to that in FIG. 16 .
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the surface roughness of a first deposit and the surface roughness of a second deposit.
  • One aspect of the present disclosure realizes a flow path substrate that can detect multiple substances by the simple operation of introducing liquid into multiple flow paths. According to one aspect of the present disclosure, it is possible to detect multiple substances by the simple operation of introducing liquid into multiple flow paths.
  • Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a detection system 1 of the present disclosure.
  • Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the appearance of a cartridge 2 and an example of the appearance of a detection device 3.
  • Fig. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the detection system 1. As shown in Fig. 1, the detection system 1 may include a cartridge 2 and a detection device 3.
  • the cartridge 2 is a test kit that detects a target substance contained in a specimen collected from a subject.
  • the cartridge 2 may be a test kit that is capable of amplifying nucleic acid derived from the target substance using a reagent when the target substance is contained in a specimen inserted into the cartridge 2.
  • the cartridge 2 may include a main body portion 21 and a bottle portion 22.
  • the subject is not limited to humans, but may be any living organism capable of carrying a virus or bacteria, such as a mammal, bird, reptile, or amphibian.
  • the detection target may be, for example, a virus or bacteria.
  • the type of virus or bacteria contained in the sample is not limited to one type, and may be two or more types.
  • examples of the types of virus include influenza virus, coronavirus (e.g., SARS-CoV-2), respiratory syncytial virus (RS virus), human metapneumovirus, norovirus, HIV (Human Immunoficiency Virus), herpes virus, streptococcus, and Mycoplasma pominis.
  • the detection device 3 is a device that detects nucleic acid derived from the detection target when the nucleic acid is amplified in the cartridge 2.
  • the detection device 3 may have a housing capable of receiving the cartridge 2.
  • the detection device 3 may determine whether a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present.
  • the detection device 3 may determine that the sample is positive when a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present.
  • the detection device 3 may be a measurement device that measures the concentration of nucleic acid derived from the detection target.
  • the detection device 3 is described as determining whether the sample is positive.
  • a determination device separate from the detection device 3 may determine whether the sample is positive by obtaining data from the detection device 3 corresponding to the amount of nucleic acid detected by the detection device 3.
  • the nucleic acid derived from the detection target may be amplified by an isothermal nucleic acid amplification method.
  • the isothermal nucleic acid amplification method include the Nucieic Acid Sequence-Based Amplification (NASBA) method.
  • Other examples include the Nicking Enzyme Amplification (NEAR) method, the Loop-mediated Isothermal Amplification (LAMP) method, and the Transcription mediated Amplification (TMA) method.
  • the NASBA method may be used as the isothermal nucleic acid amplification method.
  • the NASBA method is an isothermal nucleic acid amplification method that uses three types of enzymes (AMV reverse transcriptase, RNase H, and T7 RNA polymerase) and two types of primers.
  • AMV reverse transcriptase AMV reverse transcriptase
  • RNase H RNase H
  • T7 RNA polymerase T7 RNA polymerase
  • simply adding the NASBA substrate and enzymes to the template RNA results in amplified antisense single-stranded RNA. Since the entire series of steps in the NASBA reaction proceeds isothermally, the nucleic acid amplification reaction of RNA can be carried out without complex temperature control.
  • sequence-specific detection can be performed using a detection probe without going through a denaturation step.
  • Reference numeral 1101 in Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of the cartridge 2.
  • Reference numeral 1102 in Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of a window portion 211 of the cartridge 2 as viewed from above.
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of use of the cartridge 2 and the detection device 3.
  • the main body 21 may include a flow path substrate 4.
  • the flow path substrate 4 may include a liquid receiving portion 41 that receives liquid.
  • the flow path substrate 4 may include a storage portion 46 that stores liquid that has flowed through the flow path substrate 4.
  • the housing of the main body 21 may be made of an opaque material.
  • the main body 21 may include a window portion 211 so that the inside of the main body 21 can be seen.
  • the bottle portion 22 is a container capable of holding liquid.
  • the bottle portion 22 may be made of a transparent material, but may also be made of an opaque material.
  • the liquid receiving section 41 receives the liquid that has flowed in from the bottle section 22.
  • the liquid received by the liquid receiving section 41 flows through a flow path 45 (see FIG. 5) arranged in the flow path substrate 4, and is then stored in the storage section 46.
  • a reagent may be arranged in the flow path 45.
  • an internal standard (standard section) 47 may be provided near the storage section 46. The internal standard 47 may be used for optical comparison with the storage section 46.
  • the flow path substrate 4 may have four flow paths 45, 45A to 45D (see FIG. 5).
  • a mixed fluid containing a sample and a labeling substance that reacts with the target substance contained in the sample may be flowed through at least one of the flow paths 45A to 45D.
  • the internal standard 47 may be located in a region different from the flow path 45 and used for comparison with a mixed fluid containing the sample and the labeling substance that reacts with the target substance contained in the sample.
  • the intensity of light (e.g., fluorescence) emitted by the internal standard 47 may be compared with the intensity of light (e.g., fluorescence) emitted by the sample and the labeling substance that reacts with the target substance contained in the sample.
  • the main body 21 is formed with a window 211 so that the storage sections 46 and internal standards 47 arranged on the flow path substrate 4 can be seen through the window 211 when viewed from above.
  • the window 211 may be formed so that all of the storage sections 46 and all of the internal standards 47 can be seen.
  • the storage sections 46 and the internal standards 47 may be arranged on the main body 21 so as to be optically exposed from the window 211.
  • the sampler 23 may be attached to the main body 21.
  • the sampler 23 may include a specimen collection section 231 and a fixing section 232.
  • the specimen collection section 231 is a section for collecting a specimen.
  • the specimen collection section 231 may be, for example, a pleated resin member.
  • the fixing section 232 may fix the bottle section 22 to the main body 21 when the sampler 23 is inserted into the bottle section 22.
  • the connection section between the main body 21 and the bottle section 22 may have, for example, a screw structure.
  • a lid may be provided at the connection section of the bottle section 22 with the main body 21. This allows the inside of the bottle section 22 to be sealed.
  • the lid may be made of aluminum. The subject may remove the lid and insert the sampler 23 into the bottle section 22.
  • the subject when collecting saliva as a sample, for example, the subject inserts the sample collection portion 231 into the subject's mouth, thereby attaching saliva to the sample collection portion 231. As shown by reference numeral 1112 in FIG. 3, the subject attaches saliva to the sample collection portion 231, and then inserts the sampler 23 into the bottle portion 22.
  • the bottle portion 22 may contain a buffer solution 24.
  • An example of the buffer solution 24 is a NASBA dissolving solution.
  • the buffer solution 24 may contain, for example, a surfactant and an RNA (Ribonucleic acid) degrading enzyme inhibitor.
  • the RNA degrading enzyme inhibitor may be disposed on the flow path substrate 4. In this case, the buffer solution 24 may not contain an RNA degrading enzyme inhibitor.
  • An example of a surfactant is Tween-20 (polysorbate 20), which is an example of a non-ionic surfactant.
  • the detection device 3 may include a receiving section 36 capable of receiving the cartridge 2.
  • the subject attaches the cartridge 2 containing the sample to the receiving section 36, and then turns the detection device 3 upside down, as shown by reference numeral 1114 in FIG. 3.
  • the buffer solution 24 mixed with the sample flows under its own weight through the sampler 23 into the flow path substrate 4 provided in the main body section 21.
  • the buffer solution 24 mixed with the sample may be an example of a liquid received by the liquid receiving section 41.
  • the buffer solution 24 may be poured into the flow path substrate 4.
  • the buffer solution 24 itself is an example of a liquid that can be accommodated by the bottle portion 22, and an example of a liquid that can be received by the liquid receiving portion 41.
  • a substance that contains a pathogen other than the detection target may be mixed into the buffer solution 24.
  • the buffer solution 24 mixed with the substance is an example of a liquid that can be accommodated by the bottle portion 22, and an example of a liquid that can be received by the liquid receiving portion 41.
  • Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the detection system 1.
  • the detection device 3 may be a device that detects nucleic acid amplified in a flow channel 45 provided in the flow channel substrate 4.
  • the detection device 3 may include, for example, a heating unit 31, a pressurizing unit 32, a light irradiating unit 33, an imaging unit 34, and a control unit 35.
  • the heating unit 31 may be a member that heats the cartridge 2 inserted into the detection device 3.
  • the heating unit 31 may heat the cartridge 2 to a temperature that promotes the reaction between the nucleic acid and the reagent in the flow path substrate 4.
  • the heating unit 31 may heat the cartridge 2 to a temperature of 37°C to 41°C.
  • the heating unit 31 first heats the cartridge 2 at a temperature of 80°C to 95°C for 3 to 10 minutes. This breaks down the pathogens and allows the nucleic acid components to be released from the pathogens. It also deactivates the DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid) decomposing enzyme.
  • the heating unit 31 may then maintain the cartridge 2 at a temperature of 37°C to 41°C.
  • the heating unit 31 may heat each part of the cartridge 2 at a different temperature.
  • the heating unit 31 may have a first heating unit that heats the bottle portion 22 at a temperature of 80°C to 95°C, and a second heating unit that heats the main body portion 21 at a temperature of 37°C to 41°C. This allows the pathogens to be crushed in the bottle portion 22, and nucleic acid components to be liberated from the pathogens. Also, the DNA degrading enzyme can be inactivated in the bottle portion 22. The liquid in the bottle portion 22 then flows into the flow path substrate 4 provided in the main body portion 21, which is maintained at a temperature of 37°C to 41°C, and the nucleic acid may be amplified in the flow path substrate 4.
  • the temperature to which the heating unit 31 heats may be the set temperature of the heating unit 31. Alternatively, it may be the liquid temperature of the liquid to be temperature-adjusted by the heating unit 31.
  • the temperature to which the heating unit 31 heats is the liquid temperature of the liquid to be temperature-adjusted by the heating unit 31, for example, the average temperature or central temperature of the liquid may be used.
  • the average temperature may be, for example, the average of the liquid temperature over a predetermined time.
  • the central temperature may be, for example, the temperature at the center between the maximum and minimum liquid temperatures.
  • the central temperature may be calculated as the sum of the maximum and minimum temperatures divided by 2.
  • the detection device 3 may be equipped with a temperature sensor that detects the liquid temperature of the liquid to be temperature-adjusted by the heating unit 31.
  • the heating unit 31 may heat the liquid whose temperature is to be detected by the temperature sensor so as to maintain the liquid temperature detected by the temperature sensor.
  • the pressurizing unit 32 may be a member that pressurizes the bottle portion 22 of the cartridge 2 inserted into the detection device 3.
  • the bottle portion 22 may be made of a material that is deformed by the pressurization of the pressurizing unit 32.
  • the bottle portion 22 is deformed by the pressurization of the pressurizing unit 32, which makes it easier for the liquid in the bottle portion 22 to flow into the main body portion 21.
  • the pressurizing unit 32 may be a member that pressurizes at least a portion of the side of the bottle portion 22.
  • the pressurizing unit 32 may be a member that clamps the side of the bottle portion 22.
  • the pressurizing unit 32 may be disposed in a position in the detection device 3 where it can pressurize the side of the bottom side of the bottle portion 22, for example.
  • the flow channel 45 of the flow channel substrate 4 may be provided with a labeling substance that specifically binds to the nucleic acid amplified within the flow channel 45.
  • the labeling substance may be optically observable, and may be, for example, but is not limited to, a dye, a luminescent substance, or a fluorescent substance. If the labeling substance is a fluorescent substance, when the storage section 46 is irradiated with excitation light, the labeling substance bound to the nucleic acid emits fluorescence having a specific wavelength.
  • fluorescent substances contained in the labeling substance include 6-caroxyfluorescein (FAM), Texas Red (TR) (registered trademark), and cyanine (CY)-based materials.
  • FAM 6-caroxyfluorescein
  • TR Texas Red
  • CY cyanine-based materials.
  • the fluorescent substance When the fluorescent substance is 6-FAM, it emits fluorescence with a peak wavelength of 517 nm when irradiated with excitation light with a peak wavelength of 494 nm.
  • Texas Red it emits fluorescence with a peak wavelength of 615 nm when irradiated with excitation light with a peak wavelength of 596 nm.
  • the labeling substance may be, for example, a molecular beacon.
  • a molecular beacon is a type of probe DNA. Each molecule of the probe DNA is modified with a fluorescent molecule and a quenching molecule. The quenching molecule is set to absorb light in a wavelength band corresponding to the fluorescence wavelength of the fluorescent molecule, for example. The distance between the fluorescent molecule and the quenching molecule in the probe DNA that is not bound to the nucleic acid molecule amplified by the enzyme is closer than the distance between the fluorescent molecule and the quenching molecule in the probe DNA that is bound to the nucleic acid molecule amplified by the enzyme.
  • the base sequence of the probe DNA may be appropriately designed based on the base sequence of the nucleic acid to be detected.
  • the internal standard 47 may be anything that can be optically compared with the storage section 46, and may be, for example, but is not limited to, a dye, a luminescent substance, or a fluorescent substance.
  • the internal standard 47 may be a fluorescent substance that emits fluorescence when irradiated with excitation light.
  • the fluorescent substance as the internal standard 47 and the fluorescent substance contained in the labeling substance may be the same type of fluorescent substance.
  • the imaging unit 34 is a member that images the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47 through the window 211 of the main body 21. By imaging the storage unit 46, the imaging unit 34 may determine whether or not a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present in the liquid stored in the storage unit 46 based on optical information measured from the labeling substance present in the storage unit 46.
  • the optical information may be, for example, information obtained from a dye, a luminescent substance, or a fluorescent substance.
  • the optical information may be, for example, information such as wavelength or brightness value.
  • the control unit 35 may determine whether a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present in the liquid stored in the storage unit 46 based on the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the storage unit 46.
  • the imaging unit 34 may image the internal standard 47, and identify the position of the internal standard 47 in the captured image based on optical information measured from the internal standard 47.
  • the optical information may be, for example, information obtained from a dye, a luminescent substance, or a fluorescent substance.
  • the optical information may be, for example, information such as wavelength or brightness value.
  • the control unit 35 may identify the position of the internal standard 47 in the captured image based on the fluorescence emitted from the internal standard 47. The control unit 35 may then identify the position of the flow path 45 in the captured image based on the identified position of the internal standard 47.
  • the image capturing unit 34 may analyze the image of the internal standard 47 to determine whether optical information of a predetermined value or more can be measured from the internal standard 47.
  • the control unit 35 may determine that the image capturing unit 34 is operating normally if optical information of a predetermined value or more can be measured. For example, the control unit 35 may determine that fluorescence of a predetermined intensity or more can be received from the internal standard 47. The control unit 35 may determine that the image capturing unit 34 is operating normally if fluorescence of a predetermined intensity or more can be received.
  • the determination of whether optical information equal to or greater than a predetermined value has been measured may be performed once after starting the detection device 3 and before measuring the optical information obtained from the specimen.
  • the determination of whether fluorescence equal to or greater than a predetermined intensity has been received i.e., the measurement of the predetermined fluorescence intensity, may be performed once after starting the detection device 3 and before measuring the intensity of the fluorescence emitted by the specimen.
  • the control unit 35 may comprehensively control each component of the detection device 3.
  • the control unit 35 may include, for example, an intensity measurement unit 351 and a positive determination unit 352.
  • the intensity measurement unit 351 may measure optical information from the substances contained in the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47.
  • the intensity measurement unit 351 may measure the intensity of the fluorescence emitted by the substances contained in the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47 upon receiving excitation light.
  • the control unit 35 may first control the light irradiation unit 33 to irradiate the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47 with light. In this state, the control unit 35 may control the imaging unit 34 to capture an image including the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47.
  • the intensity measurement unit 351 may analyze the image captured by the imaging unit 34 and measure the brightness as optical information obtained from the substances contained in the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47.
  • control unit 35 controls the light irradiation unit 33 to irradiate the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47 with excitation light, and then analyzes the image captured by the imaging unit 34 to obtain the luminance.
  • control unit 35 may measure the intensity of the fluorescence emitted by the substances contained in the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47, respectively.
  • the intensity measuring unit 351 may measure the optical information obtained from the storage unit 46 connected to the flow path 45 in which the reagent is placed as the optical information of the detection target. For example, the intensity measuring unit 351 may measure the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the storage unit 46 connected to the flow path 45 in which the reagent is placed as the intensity of the fluorescence of the detection target. The intensity measuring unit 351 may also measure the optical information emitted from the storage unit 46 connected to the flow path 45 for the negative control as the optical information of the negative control. For example, the intensity measuring unit 351 may measure the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the storage unit 46 connected to the flow path 45 for the negative control as the intensity of the fluorescence of the negative control. The flow path 45 for the negative control will be described later. The position of the flow path 45 in which the reagent is placed and the position of the flow path 45 for the negative control may be determined in advance.
  • the positive determination unit 352 may determine whether or not a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present in the sample contained in the liquid stored in the storage unit 46 based on the optical information obtained from the storage unit 46 measured by the intensity measurement unit 351. For example, the positive determination unit 352 may determine whether a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present in the sample contained in the liquid stored in the storage unit 46 based on the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the storage unit 46 measured by the intensity measurement unit 351. If the positive determination unit 352 determines that a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present, it may determine that the sample is positive.
  • the positive determination unit 352 may determine whether a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present by comparing the value indicated by the optical information obtained from the storage unit 46 with a threshold value.
  • the threshold value may be optical information associated with the minimum concentration of nucleic acid derived from the detection target that should be determined as positive.
  • the threshold value may be set in advance through experiments, etc.
  • the positive determination unit 352 may determine whether a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present by comparing the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the storage unit 46 with the threshold value.
  • the positive determination unit 352 may determine whether the sample is positive by comparing the difference value with a value indicated by optical information obtained from the internal standard 47.
  • a value indicated by optical information obtained from the internal standard 47 For example, two internal standards 47 having different concentrations may be arranged. The positive determination unit 352 may determine that the sample is positive if the difference value is within the range of values indicated by the optical information obtained from the two internal standards 47.
  • the optical information obtained from the two internal standards 47 may be optical information associated with the concentration of the nucleic acid derived from the detection target that should be determined to be positive.
  • the optical information obtained from the two internal standards 47 may be set in advance by experiments, etc.
  • the positive determination unit 352 may determine whether the sample is positive by comparing the difference value with the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the internal standard 47. If the difference value is within the range of the fluorescence intensities indicated by the two internal standards 47, the positive determination unit 352 may determine that the sample is positive.
  • the control unit 35 may also create a calibration curve based on optical information obtained from the multiple internal standards 47. For example, the control unit 35 may create a calibration curve based on the intensity of fluorescence emitted by the multiple internal standards 47. In this case, the control unit 35 may use the calibration curve to calculate the concentration of the nucleic acid corresponding to the above-mentioned difference value.
  • the positive determination unit 352 may determine that the sample is positive if the calculated concentration of the nucleic acid is equal to or greater than a reference value.
  • the reference value may be a value associated with the concentration of the nucleic acid derived from the detection target that should be determined to be positive. The reference value may be set in advance by an experiment or the like.
  • the labeling substance and internal standard 47 are fluorescent substances
  • the control unit 35 measures the intensity of fluorescence as the optical information measured from the labeling substance and internal standard 47.
  • FIG. 5 is a plan view showing an example of a flow path substrate 4A.
  • the flow path substrate 4A is an example of the flow path substrate 4.
  • Fig. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a first region 451 and a second region 452 arranged in a flow path 45 included in the flow path substrate 4A.
  • the flow path substrate 4A may include a liquid receiving section 41 that receives liquid, and a flow path 45 that connects to the liquid receiving section 41.
  • the flow path 45 may have a first region 451 in which a first reagent 101 containing a primer is disposed, and a second region 452 in which a second reagent 102 containing an enzyme that amplifies nucleic acid is disposed at a position different from the first region 451.
  • the space in which the first region 451 is located and the space in which the second region 452 is located may be in communication with each other.
  • the flow path substrate 4A may include a liquid receiving section 41, a branch flow path 42, a flow path 45, a storage section 46, and an internal standard 47. There may be one or more flow paths 45. Also, there may be one or more internal standards 47. In this embodiment, the flow paths 45 are described as having four flow paths 45A to 45D, and the storage sections 46 are described as having four storage sections 46A to 46D, but this is not limited to this. Also, the flow path substrate 4A is described as having five internal standards 47, but this is not limited to this.
  • the liquid receiving section 41 is located above the flow path 45 and the storage section 46. Therefore, the liquid flowing from the bottle section 22 due to its own weight easily flows from the liquid receiving section 41 through the flow path 45 to the storage section 46.
  • the liquid receiving section 41 may be an opening that receives the liquid flowing from the bottle section 22.
  • the branch flow path 42 may be a flow path that connects the liquid receiving section 41 to each of the flow paths 45A to 45D.
  • the flow paths 45A to 45D may branch off from the branch flow path 42 that is connected to the liquid receiving section 41.
  • the branch flow path 42 may be in communication with the liquid receiving section 41 and each of the flow paths 45A to 45D.
  • the flow path substrate 4A may have a filter section 420.
  • the filter section 420 may be a section whose flow path width is narrower than other sections.
  • the filter section 420 may be located on the opposite side of the reservoir section 46 from the position of the reagent placed in the flow path 45. In other words, the filter section 420 may be located upstream of the position of the reagent placed in the flow path 45.
  • the filter section 420 may be located upstream of the branching position of the flow paths 45A to 45D. As shown in FIG. 5, the branch flow path 42 may have a filter section 420. This reduces the possibility of the impurities flowing into the flow paths 45A to 45D when solid impurities are contained in the liquid flowing from the liquid receiving section 41.
  • the flow path substrate 4A may not have a branch flow path 42.
  • the flow paths 45A to 45D may branch off from the liquid receiving section 41.
  • the flow path 45 may be connected to the liquid receiving section 41.
  • the filter section may be located on the opposite side of the reservoir section 46 from the position of the reagent placed in the flow path 45 in each of the flow paths 45A to 45D.
  • Each of the flow paths 45A to 45D may have a filter section upstream of the position where the first reagent 101 is placed or the position where the first reagent 101 can be placed.
  • all of the flow paths 45A-45D may branch off from one liquid receiving section 41 or from a branch flow path 42 connected to one liquid receiving section 41.
  • the flow path substrate 4A may have multiple liquid receiving sections 41.
  • each flow path 45 may be connected to each liquid receiving section 41, or one or multiple flow paths 45 may be connected to each liquid receiving section 41.
  • the flow paths 45A to 45D may be flow paths for flowing liquid. At least one of the flow paths 45A to 45D may be used to flow a mixed fluid containing a specimen and a labeling substance that reacts with the target substance contained in the specimen. Each of the flow paths 45A to 45D may be a flow path that receives liquid flowing from the liquid receiving section 41 and flows it to the storage sections 46A to 46D that are connected to each of the flow paths 45A to 45D. Each of the flow paths 45A to 45D may be connected from the liquid receiving section 41 to the storage sections 46A to 46D.
  • the reagent may be disposed on the opposite side of the liquid receiving section 41 with respect to the branching position of the flow paths 45A to 45D. In this way, if the liquid received in the liquid receiving section 41 contains nucleic acid derived from the detection target, the nucleic acid derived from the detection target can be amplified in the flow path 45.
  • one of the flow paths 45A to 45D may have a first region 451 in which the first reagent 101 is disposed, and a second region 452 in which the second reagent 102 is disposed at a position different from the first region 451.
  • the liquid received in the liquid receiving section 41 flows through each of the flow paths 45A-45D and is stored in the storage sections 46A-45D.
  • the flow path 45B has a first region 451 and a second region 452. Therefore, the liquid flowing through the flow path 45B comes into contact with the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102. If the sample contains the detection target, the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 can amplify the nucleic acid derived from the detection target.
  • the nucleic acid derived from the detection target can be amplified by the simple operation of flowing liquid through the flow channel 45 without using a special tool such as a pipette.
  • the first reagent 101 may contain, for example, a primer having a sequence complementary to the sequence of a nucleic acid molecule derived from the detection target.
  • the primer may be added as necessary as long as it is capable of amplifying the target nucleic acid molecule, and may be, for example, one type or three or more types.
  • the primer may be, for example, a first primer and a second primer.
  • the first primer may be a forward primer that amplifies the nucleic acid molecule to be detected in the sense direction
  • the second primer may be a reverse primer that amplifies the nucleic acid molecule in the antisense direction.
  • the first reagent 101 may further contain, for example, deoxynucleoside triphosphates (dNTPs), nucleoside triphosphates (NTPs), trehalose, and an RNase inhibitor. However, if an RNase inhibitor is contained in the bottle portion 22, the RNase inhibitor does not need to be contained in the first reagent 101.
  • dNTPs deoxynucleoside triphosphates
  • NTPs nucleoside triphosphates
  • trehalose an RNase inhibitor
  • the first reagent 101 may be disposed in the first region 451 as a plurality of first attachments.
  • a dried product of a solution containing the above-mentioned reagent may be disposed as an attachment of the first reagent 101.
  • the surface area of the first attachment can be increased. Therefore, the solubility of the first reagent 101 in the liquid can be increased.
  • the first reagent 101 may be disposed in the first region 451 as a plurality of films.
  • the number of first attachments may be more than one, and may be, for example, 5 or more, or 10 or more.
  • the multiple first attachments may be arranged in one direction.
  • the one direction may be along the flow path 45. This allows the first reagent 101 to be dissolved in the liquid sequentially along the flow of the liquid.
  • the multiple first attachments may be arranged in one direction along the flow path 45.
  • the first reagent 101 is arranged in one row as the multiple first attachments, but they may be arranged in two or more rows.
  • the multiple first attachments may be arranged on the bottom 454 of the flow path 45 so as not to come into contact with the inner wall 455 of the flow path 45. This makes it easier to dissolve the first reagent 101 in the liquid.
  • the first attachment may have a dot shape when viewed in a plane, as shown in FIG. 6.
  • the first attachment may have a linear shape, an elliptical shape, or a polygonal shape such as a square, hexagon, or star shape when viewed in a plane.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the surface roughness of the first attachment and the surface roughness of the second attachment (second reagent 102).
  • the diagram indicated by reference numeral 2101 in FIG. 21 is an enlarged photograph of the first attachment (first reagent 101), and the graph indicated by reference numeral 2102 shows the surface height of the flow channel 45 at locations where the first attachment is attached and at locations where it is not attached. Locations where the surface height is 0.000 ⁇ m are the surface of the flow channel 45, and locations where the surface height is greater than 0.000 ⁇ m are the surfaces where the first attachment is attached.
  • the surface roughness of the first attachment may be greater than the surface roughness of the flow path 45. This can disrupt the flow of the liquid flowing near the first attachment, and promote dissolution of the first reagent 101.
  • An example of the surface roughness is the arithmetic mean roughness Sa (ISO 25178).
  • the surface roughness (Sa) of the first attachment may be set to, for example, 0.6 to 3 ⁇ m, or 1 to 3 ⁇ m.
  • the surface roughness of the first attachment illustrated in the graph with reference numeral 2102 was 1.55 ⁇ m.
  • the surface roughness (Sa) of the flow path may be set to, for example, less than 0.5 ⁇ m, or less than 0.3 ⁇ m.
  • the surface roughness of the flow path 45 illustrated in the graph with reference numeral 2102 was 0.19 ⁇ m.
  • the surface roughness Sa of the flow path 45 can be obtained from the measurement results of the entire flow path 45.
  • the surface roughness Sa of the flow path 45 may be obtained from the measurement results of the entire bottom of the flow path 45. It may also be obtained from the measurement results of any part of the flow path 45.
  • the surface roughness of the flow path 45 may be obtained by the arithmetic average of the measurement results.
  • the first attachment may have a portion where the surface roughness is locally smaller than the surface roughness of the flow path 45, and the flow path 45 may have a portion where the surface roughness is locally larger than the surface roughness of the first attachment.
  • the second reagent 102 may be, for example, an enzyme such as AMV-RT (Avian Myeloblastosis Virus), RNase H (Ribonuclease H), and T7 RNA polymerase.
  • the second reagent 102 may contain, for example, trehalose and a surfactant.
  • the second reagent 102 may be disposed in the second region 452 as a plurality of second attachments.
  • a dried product of a solution containing the above-mentioned reagent may be disposed as an attachment of the second reagent 102. This allows the second reagent 102 to dissolve in the liquid when the liquid that has flowed into the flow path 45 comes into contact with the second attachment.
  • the surface area of the second attachment can be increased. Therefore, the solubility of the second reagent 102 in the liquid can be increased.
  • the second reagent 102 may be disposed in the second region 452 as a plurality of films.
  • the number of second attachments may be more than one, and may be, for example, 5 or more, or 10 or more.
  • the multiple second attachments may be arranged in one direction. This allows the second reagent 102 to be dissolved in the liquid sequentially along the flow of the liquid.
  • the multiple second attachments may be arranged in one direction along the flow path 45.
  • the second reagent 102 is arranged in one row as the multiple second attachments, but they may be arranged in two or more rows.
  • the multiple second attachments may be arranged on the bottom 454 of the flow path 45 so as not to come into contact with the inner wall 455 of the flow path 45. This makes it even easier to dissolve the second reagent 102 in the liquid.
  • the second attachment may have a dot shape when viewed in a plane, as shown in FIG. 6.
  • the second attachment may have a linear shape, an elliptical shape, or a polygonal shape such as a square, hexagon, or star shape when viewed in a plane.
  • the figure indicated by the reference numeral 2103 is an enlarged photograph of the second adhesion
  • the graph indicated by the reference numeral 2104 shows the surface height of the flow path 45 at the locations where the second adhesion is adhered and at the locations where the second adhesion is not adhered.
  • the locations where the surface height is 0.000 ⁇ m are the surfaces of the flow path 45, and the locations where the surface height is greater than 0.000 ⁇ m are the surfaces where the second adhesion is adhered.
  • the surface roughness of the first attachment and the surface roughness of the second attachment may be different. This allows the dissolution speeds of the first attachment and the second attachment to differ. For example, as shown in the graphs indicated by reference numerals 2102 and 2104, the surface roughness of the first attachment may be greater than the surface roughness of the second attachment. This allows the flow of liquid flowing near the first attachment to be disturbed, and the dissolution of the first reagent 101 to be promoted.
  • An example of an index of surface roughness is the arithmetic mean roughness Sa (ISO 25178).
  • the surface roughness (Sa) of the second attachment may be set to, for example, 0.1 to 0.5 ⁇ m, or 0.2 to 0.4 ⁇ m.
  • the surface roughness of the second attachment illustrated in the graph indicated by reference numeral 2104 was 0.27 ⁇ m.
  • the surface roughness Sa of the second attachment can be determined from the measurement results of the entire second attachment. That is, it can be determined from the measurement results of the entire surface roughness of multiple second attachments. It may also be determined from the measurement results of any part of any second attachment. When multiple measurement results of any part of any second attachment are obtained, the surface roughness of the second attachment may be determined by the arithmetic average of the measurement results.
  • the second attachment may have a portion where the surface roughness is locally greater than the surface roughness of the first attachment, and the first attachment may have a portion where the surface roughness is locally less than the surface roughness of the second attachment.
  • the surface roughness of the second attachment may be greater than the surface roughness of the flow path 45.
  • the second attachment may have a portion where the surface roughness is locally smaller than the surface roughness of the flow path 45, and the flow path 45 may have a portion where the surface roughness is locally greater than the surface roughness of the second attachment.
  • the second region 452 may be disposed on the opposite side of the liquid receiving section 41 with respect to the position where the first region 451 is disposed. In other words, the second region 452 may be disposed downstream of the first region 451. Therefore, the liquid flowing through the flow path 45B can be brought into contact with the first reagent 101 and then the second reagent 102.
  • the second region 452 may be disposed closer to the storage section 46 than the first region 451.
  • the first region 451, the second region 452, and the storage section 46 may be disposed in this order along the flow path 45. Therefore, the liquid flowing through the flow path 45B can be brought into contact with the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 in this order, and then stored in the storage section 46.
  • the liquid containing the nucleic acid derived from the target of detection can first be brought into contact with the first reagent 101. This allows the nucleic acid derived from the target of detection to be annealed with the first primer and the second primer. After that, the liquid flowing through the flow path 45B comes into contact with the enzyme contained in the second reagent 102, thereby amplifying the nucleic acid derived from the target of detection.
  • the first region 451 may contain a first primer and a second primer as the first reagent 101. Therefore, for example, dNTP and NTP may be placed in the second region 452 as the second reagent 102. Even with this arrangement, it is possible to amplify the nucleic acid derived from the detection target contained in the liquid flowing through the flow path 45.
  • the second attachment may be larger than the first attachment.
  • the first attachment and the second attachment may be disposed in the flow path 45 by applying a solution of the first reagent 101 and a solution of the second reagent 102 to the flow path 45.
  • the second reagent 102 may contain a surfactant. Therefore, the solution of the second reagent 102 spreads more easily on the bottom surface of the flow path 45 than the solution of the first reagent 101.
  • the total area of the multiple first attachments can be determined by the amount of solution containing the first reagent 101.
  • the total area of the multiple second attachments can be determined by the amount of solution containing the second reagent 102.
  • the total area of the multiple first attachments can be approximately twice the total area of the multiple second attachments.
  • the width of the flow path 45 may be, for example, 220 ⁇ m.
  • the diameter of the first attachment may be, for example, 50 to 100 ⁇ m.
  • the interval between the first attachments may be 100 to 200 ⁇ m.
  • the second attachment is dot-shaped, its diameter may be smaller than the width of the flow path 45.
  • the diameter of the second attachment may be, for example, 80 to 200 ⁇ m.
  • the dot interval between the second attachments may be 200 to 250 ⁇ m. Also, as shown in the graphs 2102 and 2104 in FIG. 21, the diameter of the second attachment may be larger than the first attachment.
  • the heights shown in the graphs 2102 and 2104 can be considered to represent the heights of the first attachment and the second attachment, respectively.
  • the diameter of the first deposit illustrated in the graph with reference numeral 2102 is 14.193 ⁇ m
  • the diameter of the second deposit illustrated in the graph with reference numeral 2104 is 19.816 ⁇ m.
  • the height of the second deposit may be greater than that of the first deposit.
  • the amount of liquid containing a specimen contained in the bottle portion 22 is approximately 50 nL, approximately 48 nL of the first reagent 101 solution and approximately 24 nL of the second reagent 102 solution are required to amplify the nucleic acid contained in the liquid.
  • the application amount per attachment is approximately 0.7 nL, the number of first attachments will be 69 and the number of second attachments will be 34.
  • the amounts of these liquids and solutions are less than when a PCR (Polymerase Chain Reaction) tube is used.
  • the amount of liquid containing the specimen and the application (printing amount) of the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 applied to the flow path 45 can be reduced.
  • the amounts of the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 may vary depending on the detection target. Therefore, the amount of solution of the first reagent 101, the number of first attachments, the amount of solution of the second reagent 102, and the number of second attachments may be changed depending on the detection target. In addition, the size of the first attachments, the size of the second attachments, the spacing between the first attachments, and the spacing between the second attachments may be adjusted depending on the length of the flow path 45 in the extension direction and the width of the flow path 45.
  • the nucleic acid contained in the liquid flowing in from the liquid receiving section 41 may first react with the first reagent 101 arranged in the first region 451, and then react with the second reagent 102 arranged in the second region 452. This is because the first reagent 101 anneals to the nucleic acid contained in the liquid in order to amplify the nucleic acid contained in the liquid with the second reagent 102. Also, as described above, when the cartridge 2 is once heated to a high temperature and then cooled to a temperature that promotes the amplification of the nucleic acid, the nucleic acid that reacted with the first reagent 101 may be cooled before reacting with the second reagent 102.
  • the distance between the first region 451 and the second region 452 may be determined taking these points into consideration. Also, consider a case where the heating section 31 heats the bottle section 22 to a temperature of 80°C to 95°C and heats the main body section 21 to a temperature of 37°C to 41°C. In this case, the second region 452 may be positioned so that the liquid that flows from the bottle portion 22 through the liquid receiving portion 41 comes into contact with the second region 452 after the temperature of the liquid has sufficiently decreased.
  • the first region 451 and the second region 452 may be disposed in a linear portion of the flow path 45.
  • the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 can be easily disposed in the flow path 45.
  • the reagent may be disposed in two or more linear portions.
  • the flow path 45 may further contain a labeling substance that specifically binds to the amplified nucleic acid. If the labeling substance is a fluorescent substance, the labeling substance emits fluorescence when irradiated with excitation light. Therefore, the detection device 3 can measure the intensity of the fluorescence emitted by the nucleic acid derived from the detection target by irradiating the storage section 46 with excitation light.
  • the labeling substance may be disposed downstream of the first region 451.
  • the labeling substance may be disposed in the second region 452 as the second reagent 102. This allows the labeling substance to efficiently bind to the nucleic acid amplified by the enzyme contained in the second reagent 102.
  • the labeling substance may be a molecular beacon.
  • the liquid flowing through one of the flow paths 45A to 45D may function as a negative control.
  • Figure 5 shows an example in which the flow path 45A functions as a negative control flow path.
  • the flow path 45A may not have the first region 451, but may have at least a labeling substance.
  • the flow path 45A may have at least a second region 452 in which a labeling substance is disposed. This makes it possible to prevent the nucleic acid from reacting with a primer for amplifying the nucleic acid even if the liquid flowing through the flow path 45A contains nucleic acid derived from the detection target. Therefore, the detection device 3 can detect the intensity of fluorescence emitted by a substance other than the nucleic acid derived from the detection target by irradiating the liquid flowing through the flow path 45A and stored in the storage section 46A with excitation light.
  • the detection device 3 can accurately detect the intensity of fluorescence emitted by the nucleic acid derived from the detection target that has been amplified by reacting with the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 in the flow path 45B, using the intensity of the fluorescence as a reference.
  • both the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 may not be arranged, and a flow path 45 that is not intended to detect nucleic acids derived from the detection target may be connected to the branch flow path 42.
  • flow paths 45C and 45D may also be flow paths that are not intended to detect nucleic acids derived from the detection target.
  • Each of the flow channels 45A to 45D may have a bending region 453A to 453D downstream of the flow channel 45.
  • Each of the flow channels 45A to 45D may have a bending region 453A to 453D downstream of the position where the reagent is placed or the position where the reagent can be placed. This allows the liquid in which the reagent is dissolved to flow into the bending region 453. As this liquid flows through the bending region 453, the reagent and the liquid can be mixed. Therefore, the nucleic acid derived from the detection target can be reacted with the reagent efficiently.
  • a bending region 453 is formed in the flow path 45 in which the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 are placed. In this embodiment, it is sufficient that a bending region 453B is formed at least in the flow path 45B.
  • the storage section 46 may be connected to the flow path 45. As shown in FIG. 5, the storage sections 46A to 46D may be connected to the flow paths 45A to 45D, respectively.
  • the storage section 46 may store the liquid that flows from the flow path 45.
  • the storage section 46 may be part of the flow path.
  • the storage section 46 may be located downstream of the second region 452 and store a liquid containing the amplified nucleic acid.
  • the flow path 45B has a first region 451 and a second region 452. Therefore, the storage section 46B may be located downstream of the second region 452B and store a liquid containing the amplified nucleic acid.
  • the storage section 46 can store the liquid that flows from the flow path 45.
  • the storage section 46 connected to the flow path 45 having the first region 451 and the second region 452 if the liquid contains nucleic acid derived from the detection target, the liquid containing the amplified nucleic acid can be stored. Therefore, the detection device 3 can image the amplified nucleic acid in a stable state.
  • the width of the storage section 46 may be greater than the width of the flow path 45. This can improve the measurement accuracy of the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the storage section 46.
  • the volume of the storage section 46 may be a volume equivalent to the amount of liquid received by the liquid receiving section 41.
  • the volume of the storage section 46 may be, for example, approximately 50 nL. In this manner, the storage section 46 may be formed on the flow path substrate 4A so that the volume of the storage section 46 is relatively small.
  • the first distance D1 between two adjacent storage sections 46 among the storage sections 46A-46D may be greater than the second distance D2 between the two flow paths 45 connected to each of the two storage sections 46. This allows the spacing between the two adjacent storage sections 46 to be relatively wide. Therefore, the detection device 3 can easily obtain the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from each storage section 46 through image analysis.
  • a reagent may be placed in the storage section 46.
  • a reagent used for amplifying nucleic acid derived from the detection target may be placed in the storage section 46.
  • the first reagent 101 or the second reagent 102 may be placed in the storage section 46.
  • a portion of the first reagent 101 and/or the second reagent 102 may be placed in the storage section 46.
  • the first reagent 101 or the second reagent 102 different from the reagent placed in the storage section 46 may be placed in the flow path 45 located upstream compared to the storage section 46.
  • the first reagent 101 may be placed in the flow path 45 located upstream compared to the storage section 46. That is, the first region 451 may be located in the flow path 45 located upstream compared to the storage section 46, and the second region 452 may be located in the storage section 46. This allows the liquid flowing through the flow path 45B to come into contact with the first reagent 101 and then the second reagent 102 in that order.
  • the flow path substrate 4A may have a second storage portion 48 downstream of the storage portions 46A to 46D, which is connected to each of the storage portions 46A to 46D.
  • the second storage portion 48 may be disposed at a position farther away from the liquid receiving portion 41 than the storage portion 46. In this case, when liquid flows into the storage portion 46 in an amount equal to or greater than the capacity of the storage portion 46, the liquid leaking out of the storage portion 46 can be stored in the second storage portion 48. This reduces the possibility of liquid flowing back from the storage portion 46 into the flow path 45.
  • the second storage section 48 may be provided with a substance that functions as a positive control.
  • a substance that functions as a positive control may be provided only in the second storage section 48 of the flow path substrate 4A used as a positive control.
  • the substance may be optically compared with the storage section 46, and may be, for example, a dye, a luminescent substance, or a fluorescent substance, but is not limited to this.
  • a sample that intentionally contains the detection target may be flowed through the flow path 45 via the liquid receiving section 41 before measuring the optical information of the sample to be determined, and the optical information corresponding to the nucleic acid derived from the detection target may be measured in the second storage section 48.
  • the second storage section 48 can be viewed through the window section 211 of the main body section 21.
  • the flow path substrate 4A may have a sensing substance located at a position farther from the liquid receiving section 41 than the storage section 46, which detects the passage of the liquid flowing through the flow path 45.
  • the flow path 45 may be a space that branches at the branch flow path 42 and then communicates with the second storage section 48 via the storage section 46.
  • the position farther from the liquid receiving section 41 than the storage section 46 is the position where the liquid received by the liquid receiving section 41 reaches after flowing through the flow path 45 and passing through the storage section 46.
  • the sensing substance may also be a fluorescent substance that is soluble in the liquid flowing through the flow path 45.
  • the sensing substance dissolves. Therefore, the luminance of the sensing substance decreases. By checking the decrease in the luminance of the sensing substance, the progress of the liquid can be confirmed. In other words, based on whether the luminance of the sensing substance has decreased, it is possible to determine whether the liquid flowing through the flow path 45 is flowing normally.
  • the detection substance is not particularly limited as long as it can confirm the passage of liquid flowing through the flow channel 45.
  • the second storage section 48 only needs to be connected to at least one of the storage sections 46A to 46D. However, the flow path substrate 4A does not need to have the second storage section 48.
  • the flow path substrate 4A may have an outlet 49 connected to the flow path 45 downstream of the flow path 45.
  • the outlet 49 may be connected to the storage section 46 downstream of the storage section 46.
  • the outlet 49 may be connected to the second storage section 48 downstream of the second storage section 48.
  • the outlet 49 is a vent that discharges air or liquid in the space located between the liquid receiving section 41 and the outlet 49 to the outside of the flow path substrate 4A.
  • the space located between the liquid receiving section 41 and the outlet 49 i.e., the space located in the flow path substrate 4A including the flow path 45, may be referred to as a flow path.
  • reagent placement position In this embodiment, when the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 are placed in the flow path 45, at least a primer and an enzyme may be placed in the flow path 45.
  • Other reagents may be placed at positions other than the flow path 45.
  • dNTP, NTP, RNase inhibitor, trehalose, and surfactant may be placed upstream of the flow path 45.
  • these reagents may be placed at branching positions of the flow paths 45A to 45D.
  • these reagents may be placed in the liquid receiving section 41 and/or the branch flow path 42.
  • the standard substance may be placed downstream of the flow path 45.
  • the standard substance may be placed in the storage section 46.
  • the flow path substrate 4A includes four flow paths 45, but is not limited thereto.
  • the flow path substrate 4A may include at least one flow path 45 having a first region 451 and a second region 452.
  • these flow paths 45 may function as flow paths used to detect the same detection target. That is, the first reagent 101 arranged in the plurality of flow paths 45 may be the same reagent, and the second reagent 102 arranged in the plurality of flow paths 45 may be the same reagent.
  • the flow path substrate 4A includes a plurality of flow paths 45 having a first region 451 and a second region 452
  • these flow paths 45 may function as flow paths used to detect different detection targets. That is, the first reagent 101 arranged in the plurality of flow paths 45 may be different reagents, and the second reagent 102 arranged in the plurality of flow paths 45 may be different reagents.
  • the flow path substrate 4A may have at least one flow path 45 for a positive control. That is, it may have a flow path 45 for flowing a liquid that is intentionally containing a detection target.
  • the flow path 45 for the positive control may have a first region 451 and a second region 452 arranged from the upstream side. A liquid that is intentionally containing a detection target that reacts with the first reagent 101 and the second reagent may be flowed in the flow path 45 for the positive control.
  • the flow path 45 having the first region 451 and the second region 452 used for flowing a liquid containing a sample may be substituted as the flow path 45 for the positive control.
  • the number of storage sections 46 may be determined by the number of flow paths 45 to which they are connected.
  • the internal standard 47 is disposed on the flow path substrate 4A, but is not limited to this.
  • the internal standard 47 may be disposed on the surface of the housing of the cartridge 2, instead of on the flow path substrate 4A. In this case, the internal standard 47 may be disposed near the window portion 211 of the main body portion 21.
  • the internal standard 47 may be located in a region different from the branch flow path 42, the flow path 45, and the storage portion 46.
  • Method of manufacturing the flow path substrate according to the first embodiment 7 is a flow chart showing an example of a method for manufacturing the flow path substrate 4 A. This manufacturing method may be performed by a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the flow path substrate 4 A.
  • the liquid receiving portion 41 and the flow path 45 may be formed on the substrate (S1; formation process).
  • a branch flow path 42, a storage portion 46, a second storage portion 48, and a discharge port 49 may be formed on the substrate.
  • the liquid receiving portion 41 and the flow path 45 may be formed, for example, as follows. For example, a mold in which the shapes of the liquid receiving portion 41 and the flow path 45 are patterned is placed on a substrate, and then resin is poured in. After the resin has hardened, the mold is removed. After the mold is removed, a lid is placed on the hardened resin, thereby forming the liquid receiving portion 41 and the flow path 45 on the substrate.
  • a reagent may be placed in the flow path 45.
  • a first reagent 101 may be placed in the flow path 45B (S2; first placement step).
  • the first reagent 101 may be placed in the flow path 45B by applying the first reagent 101 to the flow path 45B.
  • a second reagent 102 may be placed in the flow paths 45A and 45B (S3; second placement step).
  • the second reagent 102 may be placed in the flow paths 45A and 45B by applying the second reagent 102 to the flow paths 45A and 45B.
  • an internal standard 47 may be placed on the substrate (S4).
  • the internal standard 47 may be placed on the substrate by applying a fluorescent substance as the internal standard 47 to the substrate.
  • the fluorescent substance may be placed in the second storage section 48 by applying the fluorescent substance to the second storage section 48 (S5).
  • the order of the processes from S2 to S5 does not matter.
  • the processes from S2 to S5 may be performed in parallel.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a method of applying a reagent 100 to a flow path 45 provided in a flow path substrate 4A.
  • Reference numeral 1131 in FIG. 9 is a schematic plan view showing an example of a flow path 45 to which the reagent 100 has been applied, and reference numeral 1132 in FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing another example of a method of applying the reagent 100 to the flow path 45.
  • the reagent 100 in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 may be the first reagent 101 or the second reagent 102.
  • the application of the reagent 100 may be performed, for example, using an inkjet printer.
  • Using an inkjet printer allows for fine application of the reagent 100.
  • the inkjet printer may include a head 201 that ejects the reagent 100. As shown by reference numeral 1121 in FIG. 8, the inkjet printer may eject the reagent 100 from the head 201, thereby adhering the reagent 100 to the flow path 45, as shown by reference numeral 1122 in FIG. 8.
  • the reagent 100 that has adhered to the flow path 45 may be allowed to dry naturally.
  • the inkjet printer may apply the reagent 100 while moving the head 201 along the extension direction of the flow channel 45, thereby adhering multiple reagents 100 to the bottom 454 of the flow channel 45, as shown by reference numeral 1131 in FIG. 9.
  • the inkjet printer may control the movement of the head 201 and the ejection of the reagent 100 so that the multiple deposits are placed independently (separately) on the bottom 454.
  • the inkjet printer may also control the movement of the head 201 and the ejection of the reagent 100 so that the deposits do not come into contact with the inner wall 455 of the flow path 45.
  • the inkjet printer may control the movement of the head 201 and the ejection of the reagent 100 so that multiple attachments are arranged independently side by side in a direction different from the extension direction of the flow channel 45.
  • the multiple attachments may be arranged side by side, for example, in the width direction of the flow channel 45.
  • new reagent 100 may be applied from above the dried reagent 100 arranged in the flow channel 45.
  • FIG. 10 is a plan view showing an example of a flow path substrate 4B.
  • Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the arrangement of detection reagents in a flow path 45 included in the flow path substrate 4B.
  • the flow path substrate 4B is an example of the flow path substrate 4.
  • the flow path substrate 4B may include a plurality of flow paths 45A-45D through which liquid flows, and a plurality of storage sections 46A-46D connected to each of the plurality of flow paths 45.
  • the plurality of flow paths 45 may include a first flow path in which at least a portion of a first detection reagent, which is a detection reagent for detecting a detection target, is located, and a second flow path in which at least a portion of a second detection reagent, which is a detection reagent for detecting a detection target different from the first detection reagent, is located.
  • the detection reagent may be an example of a reagent that reacts with the detection target.
  • the detection target may be, for example, a nucleic acid derived from the detection target. This makes it possible to detect a plurality of detection targets that are different from each other at once by the simple operation of introducing liquid into the flow path substrate 4B.
  • the flow path substrate 4B may include a liquid receiving section 41, a branch flow path 42, a plurality of flow paths 45A-45D, a plurality of storage sections 46A-46D, and an internal standard 47.
  • the flow path substrate 4B may also include a second storage section 48 and an outlet 49.
  • the flow paths 45A-45D may branch off from a branch flow path 42 connected to the liquid receiving section 41.
  • the flow path substrate 4B does not have to have a branch flow path 42.
  • the flow paths 45A-45D may branch off from the liquid receiving section 41.
  • all of the flow paths 45A-45D may branch off from a single liquid receiving section 41, or from a branch flow path 42 connected to a single liquid receiving section 41. This allows the liquid received in a single liquid receiving section 41 to be introduced into multiple flow paths 45A-45D. Therefore, multiple different detection targets can be detected at once by introducing the liquid once.
  • the detection reagent may be disposed on the opposite side of the liquid receiving section 41 from the branching position of the flow paths 45A to 45D. This reduces the possibility of different detection reagents mixing. For example, it reduces the possibility of the first detection reagent and the second detection reagent mixing.
  • Flow path substrate 4B differs from flow path substrate 4A in that the multiple flow paths 45 have a first flow path and a second flow path.
  • the multiple flow paths 45 have a first flow path and a second flow path.
  • the flow path substrate 4B may include a flow path 45B as the first flow path, and a flow path 45C as the second flow path. As shown in FIG. 10, a first region 451B and a second region 452B may be arranged in the flow path 45B, and a first region 451C and a second region 452C may be arranged in the flow path 45C.
  • a first reagent 1011 may be placed in the first region 451B as a first detection reagent.
  • a first reagent 1012 different from the first reagent 1011 may be placed in the first region 451C as a second detection reagent.
  • the first reagents 1011 and 1012 are examples of the first reagent 101.
  • the first reagent 1011 may be the second detection reagent, and the first reagent 1012 may be the first detection reagent.
  • At least a portion of the detection reagent may be located in the flow path 45, or all of the detection reagent may be located there.
  • a portion of the detection reagent may be located in the flow path 45, and the remainder of the detection reagent may be located in the storage section 46.
  • "at least a portion of the detection reagent” may refer to some types of reagents when the detection reagent contains multiple types of reagents.
  • the first reagents 1011 and 1012 may be located in the flow path 45, and the second reagents 1021 and 1022 may be located in the storage section 46.
  • substantially the same components of the detection reagent may be located in both the flow path 45 and a position other than the flow path 45.
  • substantially the same components of the detection reagent may be located in the flow path 45 and the storage section 46.
  • the first reagents 1011 and 1012 may be primers having a sequence complementary to the sequence of a nucleic acid molecule derived from the detection target.
  • the primers may be added as necessary as long as they are capable of amplifying the target nucleic acid molecule, and may be, for example, one type or three or more types.
  • the first reagents 1011 and 1012 may be, for example, a first primer and a second primer.
  • the first reagent 1012 may be a primer having a different sequence from the first reagent 1011.
  • the first reagent 1012 may be a primer having a sequence complementary to the sequence of a nucleic acid molecule derived from a detection target different from the first reagent 1011.
  • the first reagent 1011 may be a primer having a sequence complementary to the sequence of a nucleic acid molecule derived from a first detection target
  • the first reagent 1012 may be a primer having a sequence complementary to the sequence of a nucleic acid molecule derived from a second detection target different from the first detection target. This makes it possible to react the second detection target, which is different from the first detection target that reacts with the first reagent 1011, with the first reagent 1012.
  • the first detection target and the second detection target are examples of detection targets.
  • the first detection target can be amplified in the flow path 45B.
  • the second detection target can be amplified in the flow path 45C.
  • the liquid received in the liquid receiving section 41 can be introduced into multiple flow paths 45, and multiple different targets can be used as detection targets to amplify nucleic acids at once.
  • the first reagents 1011 and 1012 may contain, for example, dNTPs, NTPs, trehalose, and an RNase inhibitor. However, if an RNase inhibitor is contained in the bottle portion 22, the RNase inhibitor does not need to be contained in the first reagents 1011 and 1012.
  • a second reagent 1021 may be placed in the second region 452B as the first detection reagent.
  • a second reagent 1022 different from the second reagent 1021 may be placed in the second region 452C as the second detection reagent.
  • the second reagents 1021 and 1022 are examples of the second reagent 102.
  • the second reagent 1021 may be the second detection reagent, and the second reagent 1022 may be the first detection reagent.
  • the second reagents 1021 and 1022 may be, for example, enzymes such as AMV-RT (Avian Myeloblastosis Virus), RNase H (Ribonuclease H), and T7 RNA polymerase.
  • AMV-RT Alfal Myeloblastosis Virus
  • RNase H Random Ribonuclease H
  • T7 RNA polymerase T7 RNA polymerase.
  • the second reagent 1022 may be an enzyme with a different sequence from the second reagent 1021.
  • the second detection object which is different from the first detection object that reacts with the second reagent 1021, to react with the second reagent 1022. Therefore, if the first detection object is contained in the liquid that has flowed from the liquid receiving section 41 into the flow path 45B, the first detection object can be amplified in the flow path 45B. If the second detection object is contained in the liquid that has flowed from the liquid receiving section 41 into the flow path 45C, the second detection object can be amplified in the flow path 45C.
  • the second reagents 1021 and 1022 may contain, for example, trehalose and a surfactant.
  • the flow path 45 may further include a labeling substance disposed therein as a detection reagent.
  • the labeling substance may have a sequence corresponding to the different detection targets.
  • the labeling substance disposed in flow path 45B and the labeling substance disposed in flow path 45C may be different from each other. This allows the labeling substance to bind to the detection target in accordance with the type of detection target.
  • the labeling substance may be disposed in the second regions 452B and 452C.
  • the flow path substrate 4B may have a flow path 45 that does not function as the first flow path or the second flow path.
  • a detection reagent may not be disposed, and a flow path 45 that is not intended for detecting a detection target may be connected to the branch flow path 42.
  • the flow path substrate 4B may include a negative control flow path 45 in which at least a labeling substance is arranged and at least one of the elements used in nucleic acid amplification, such as an enzyme that amplifies nucleic acids, is not arranged.
  • the flow path 45A may be a negative control flow path in which at least a labeling substance is arranged.
  • the flow path 45A may have a second region 452A in which a second reagent 102 containing a labeling substance is arranged.
  • the flow path substrate 4B may also include a flow path 45 in which no detection reagent is arranged.
  • the flow path 45D may be a flow path in which no detection reagent is arranged.
  • the sequences of the primers and labeling substances in the detection reagents placed in each of the flow paths 45 connected to these storage sections 46 need to be different from each other.
  • some of the detection reagents placed in each of the flow paths 45 may be the same reagent.
  • the flow path substrate 4B can be manufactured more inexpensively.
  • the enzymes placed in each of the flow paths 45 may be the same reagent.
  • the dNTPs and NTPs placed in each of the flow paths 45 may also be the same reagent.
  • the RNase inhibitor, trehalose, and surfactant may also be the same reagent.
  • the same reagent may be located on the opposite side of the liquid receiving section 41 in the multiple flow paths 45 in which the different detection reagents are arranged.
  • the same reagent may be located downstream of the position in the flow path 45 where the different detection reagents are arranged.
  • the enzyme as the same reagent may be located in the second region 452B and 452C located downstream of the first region 451B and 451C in which the primer is arranged.
  • the dNTP and NTP as the same reagent may also be located in the second region 452B and 452C, for example.
  • the dNTP, NTP, RNase inhibitor, trehalose, and surfactant as the same reagent may be located in the liquid receiving section 41 and/or the branch flow path 42.
  • the length of the multiple flow paths 45 from the end opposite the storage section 46 of the detection reagent along the liquid delivery direction to the end on the storage section 46 side may be approximately the same.
  • the length of the area in which the detection reagent is arranged along the extension direction of the flow path 45 may be approximately the same. This makes it possible to make the time it takes for the liquid to pass through the area in which the detection reagent is arranged approximately the same in each flow path 45. Therefore, it is possible to make the reaction time between the detection target and the detection reagent approximately the same in each flow path 45.
  • lengths LB and LC in flow paths 45B and 45C may be approximately the same as each other.
  • Length LB is the length from the end of first region 451B opposite storage section 46B to the storage section 46B side in second region 452B.
  • Length LC is the length from the end of first region 451C opposite storage section 46C to the storage section 46C side in second region 452C.
  • Length L1B of first region 451B in which first reagent 1011 is arranged and length L1C of first region 451C in which first reagent 1012 is arranged may be approximately the same as each other or may be different from each other.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the use of multiple flow paths 45.
  • flow path 45B may have a first region 451B in which first reagent 1011 is arranged, and a second region 452B in which second reagent 1021 is arranged.
  • Flow path 45C may have a first region 451C in which first reagent 1012 is arranged, and a second region 452C in which second reagent 1022 is arranged.
  • Flow path 45D may have a first region 451D in which first reagent 1013 is arranged, and a second region 452D in which second reagent 1023 is arranged.
  • the first reagents 1011, 1012, and 1013 may be detection reagents different from each other.
  • the second reagents 1021, 1022, and 1023 may be detection reagents different from each other.
  • flow channel 45A may be a negative control flow channel in which at least a labeling substance is disposed, and at least one of the elements used in nucleic acid amplification, such as an enzyme that amplifies nucleic acids, is not disposed.
  • the same detection reagent including the primer and labeling substance, may be placed in each of some of the multiple flow paths 45.
  • the first reagent 1012 and the second reagent 1022 placed in flow path 45C may be placed in flow path 45D instead of the first reagent 1013 and the second reagent 1023.
  • the flow path substrate 4B only needs to have at least one first flow path in which a first detection reagent is disposed, and at least one second flow path in which a second detection reagent is disposed, as the flow paths 45. This makes it possible to detect multiple substances by the simple operation of introducing liquid into multiple flow paths 45.
  • the liquid introduced from the liquid receiving section 41 is branched by the branch flow path 42, flows through each of the flow paths 45A to 45D, and is stored in each of the storage sections 46A to 46D. If the liquid contains a first detection object, the first detection object reacts with the first detection reagent as the liquid flows through the first flow path in which the first detection reagent is placed. If the liquid contains a second detection object, the second detection object reacts with the second detection reagent as the liquid flows through the second flow path in which the second detection reagent is placed.
  • the detection device 3 can therefore detect a first detection target by measuring the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the storage section 46 connected to the first flow path.
  • the detection device 3 can also detect a second detection target by measuring the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the storage section 46 connected to the second flow path.
  • the detection device 3 can detect multiple different detection targets at once with the simple operation of introducing liquid into the flow path substrate 4B.
  • the flow path substrate 4B may have at least two or more flow paths 45 that function as a first flow path and a second flow path. As shown in FIG. 12, the flow path substrate 4B may have a flow path 45X having a first region 451X in which a first reagent 1014 is arranged, and a second region 452X in which a second reagent 1024 is arranged.
  • the first reagent 1014 may be different from the first reagents 1011, 1012, and 1013.
  • the second reagent 1024 may be different from the second reagents 1021, 1022, and 1023. Therefore, the detection device 3 can simultaneously detect a plurality of different detection targets equal to the number of flow paths 45 in which different detection reagents are arranged.
  • All of the first reagents 1011-1014 do not have to be different from each other. Any two of the first reagents 1011-1014 may be different detection reagents. In other words, some of the first reagents 1011-1014 may be the first detection reagent, and another part may be the second detection reagent. Also, all of the second reagents 1021-1024 do not have to be different from each other. Any two of the second reagents 1021-1024 may be different detection reagents. In other words, some of the second reagents 1021-1024 may be the first detection reagent, and another part may be the second detection reagent.
  • the flow path substrate 4B may have at least one flow path 45 for a positive control.
  • a detection reagent that reacts with a liquid that is intentionally made to contain a detection target may be placed in the flow path 45 for a positive control.
  • a flow path 45 that functions as a first flow path and/or a second flow path used to flow a liquid that contains a specimen may be substituted for the flow path 45 for a positive control.
  • a liquid that is intentionally made to contain a detection target that reacts with the detection reagent placed in the flow path 45 may be flowed in the flow path 45.
  • Method of manufacturing a flow path substrate according to the second embodiment 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a method for manufacturing the flow path substrate 4B. This manufacturing method may be performed by a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the flow path substrate 4B.
  • a flow path 45 and a storage section 46 may be formed in a substrate (S11).
  • a liquid receiving section 41, a branch flow path 42, a second storage section 48, and an outlet 49 may be formed in the substrate.
  • a detection reagent may be placed in the flow path 45.
  • a first detection reagent may be placed as a detection reagent in a first flow path, which is any one of the flow paths 45A to 45D (S12).
  • a second detection reagent different from the first detection reagent may be placed in a second flow path, which is one of the flow paths 45A to 45D and different from the first flow path in which the first detection reagent is placed (S13).
  • a fluorescent substance may be placed on the substrate as an internal standard 47 (S14).
  • a fluorescent substance may be placed in the second storage section 48 (S15).
  • the order of the processes of S12 to S15 does not matter. The processes of S12 to S15 may be performed in parallel.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 1 of the present disclosure comprises a liquid receiving section for receiving a liquid and a flow path connected to the liquid receiving section, and the flow path has a first region in which a first reagent containing a primer is disposed, and a second region in which a second reagent containing an enzyme for amplifying nucleic acid is disposed at a position different from the first region.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 2 of the present disclosure is the same as that of aspect 1, except that the second region is disposed on the opposite side of the liquid receiving section from the position where the first region is disposed.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 3 of the present disclosure in aspect 1 or 2, the flow path further includes a reservoir downstream of the second region for storing a liquid containing the amplified nucleic acid.
  • a flow path substrate according to a fourth aspect of the present disclosure is any one of the first to third aspects, wherein the first reagent is disposed in the first region as a plurality of first attachment objects.
  • a flow path substrate according to a fifth aspect of the present disclosure is similar to the fourth aspect, in that the surface roughness of the first attachment is greater than the surface roughness of the flow path.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 6 of the present disclosure is the same as in aspect 4 or 5, in which the first attachments are arranged as a coating.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 7 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 4 to 6, in which the multiple first attachments are aligned in one direction.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 8 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 4 to 7, in which the first attachments are disposed at the bottom of the flow path so as not to contact the inner wall of the flow path.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 9 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 1 to 8, in which the second reagent is disposed in the second region as a plurality of second attachments.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 10 of the present disclosure is the same as aspect 9, in that the surface roughness of the second attachment is greater than the surface roughness of the flow path.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 11 of the present disclosure is the same as that of aspect 9 or 10, in which the second attachment is arranged as a coating.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 12 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 9 to 11, in which the multiple second attachments are aligned in one direction.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 13 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 9 to 12, in which the second attachments are disposed at the bottom of the flow path so as not to contact the inner wall of the flow path.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 14 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 4 to 8, in which the second reagent is disposed in the second region as a plurality of second attachments, and the second attachments are larger than the first attachments.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 15 of the present disclosure is the flow path substrate according to claim 9, in which the first reagent is disposed in the first region as a plurality of first attachments, and the surface roughness of the second attachments is smaller than the surface roughness of the first attachments.
  • the flow channel substrate according to aspect 16 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 1 to 13, in which a labeling substance that specifically binds to the amplified nucleic acid is further disposed in the flow channel.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 17 of the present disclosure is the same as in aspect 16, in which the labeled substance is disposed downstream of the first region.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 18 of the present disclosure is the same as that of aspect 16 or 17, in which the second reagent includes the labeling substance.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 19 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 16 to 18, in which the labeling substance is a molecular beacon.
  • the cartridge according to aspect 20 of the present disclosure comprises a flow path substrate according to any one of aspects 1 to 19 and a container capable of holding a liquid.
  • the detection system according to aspect 21 of the present disclosure includes the cartridge according to aspect 20 and a detection device that detects the nucleic acid amplified in the flow path.
  • the method of manufacturing a flow path substrate according to aspect 22 of the present disclosure includes a forming step of forming a liquid receiving section for receiving a liquid and a flow path connected to the liquid receiving section on a substrate, a first disposing step of disposing a first reagent containing a primer in the flow path, and a second disposing step of disposing a second reagent containing an enzyme for amplifying nucleic acid in a position on the flow path different from the position where the first reagent is disposed.
  • the method of manufacturing a flow path substrate according to aspect 23 of the present disclosure is, in aspect 22, the first placement step is to place the first reagent in the flow path by applying a solution containing the first reagent to the flow path, and the second placement step is to place the second reagent in the flow path by applying a solution containing the second reagent to the flow path.
  • a flow path substrate is any one of Aspects 1 to 19, wherein the flow path is a plurality of flow paths, and the flow path substrate further includes a plurality of reservoirs connected to each of the plurality of flow paths;
  • the multiple flow paths include a first flow path in which at least a portion of a first detection reagent, which is a detection reagent that detects a detection target, is located, and a second flow path in which at least a portion of a second detection reagent, which is a detection reagent that detects a detection target different from the first detection reagent, is located.
  • the flow channel substrate according to aspect 25 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 1 to 19, in which the flow channel is a flow channel through which a mixed fluid containing a specimen and a labeling substance that reacts with the detection target contained in the specimen flows, and further includes a standard portion that is located in a region different from the flow channel and is compared with the mixed fluid.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 26 of the present disclosure is, in aspect 1, a plurality of flow paths through which a liquid flows, and includes a plurality of reservoirs connected to the plurality of flow paths, and the plurality of flow paths include a first flow path in which at least a portion of a first detection reagent, which is a detection reagent for detecting a detection target, is located, and a second flow path in which at least a portion of a second detection reagent, which is a detection reagent for detecting a detection target different from the first detection reagent, is located.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 27 of the present disclosure is the same as in aspect 26, in which the multiple flow paths branch off from the liquid receiving section or a flow path connected to the liquid receiving section.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 28 of the present disclosure is the same as in aspect 27, in which all of the multiple flow paths branch off from one of the liquid receiving sections or from a flow path connected to the one liquid receiving section.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 29 of the present disclosure is the same as that of aspect 27 or 28, in which the detection reagent is disposed on the opposite side of the liquid receiving section with respect to the branching position of the multiple flow paths.
  • the detection reagent includes a primer having a sequence corresponding to the detection target.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 31 of the present disclosure is the same as in aspect 30, in which the second detection reagent includes the primer having a different sequence from the first detection reagent.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 32 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 26 to 31, in which the same reagent is arranged in the multiple flow paths.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 33 of the present disclosure is the same as that of aspect 32, in which the same reagent includes an enzyme that amplifies nucleic acid.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 34 of the present disclosure is in aspect 32 or 33, and further includes a liquid receiving section for receiving liquid, and the same reagent is located on the opposite side of the flow path in which the detection reagent is disposed from the liquid receiving section.
  • the lengths of the flow paths from the end of the detection reagent opposite the storage portion to the end of the storage portion along the liquid transport direction are approximately the same for each of the multiple flow paths.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 36 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 26 to 35, further comprising a filter section in which the flow path width is narrower than other sections, and the filter section is located on the opposite side of the storage section from the position of the detection reagent.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 37 of the present disclosure is the same as in aspect 36, except that the filter section is disposed upstream of the branching position of the multiple flow paths.
  • the first distance between two adjacent storage sections among the plurality of storage sections is greater than the second distance between the two flow paths connected to each of the two storage sections.
  • the flow path substrate according to aspect 39 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 26 to 38, in which each of the multiple flow paths has multiple bending regions downstream of the detection reagent.
  • the flow path substrate 1A is a substrate used for detecting or quantifying a target substance contained in a specimen.
  • a flow path 10 is formed inside the flow path substrate 1A.
  • the specimen and the reagent are mixed inside the flow path substrate 1A.
  • the specimen mixed with the reagent is temporarily stored in the detection unit 13.
  • “storage” refers to the specimen remaining in a certain area relative to the flow inside the flow path 10, but is not limited to this.
  • the specimen may include a substance derived from a living organism.
  • the specimen may include a substance derived from a mammal, such as a human, a dog, a cat, or a cow.
  • the specimen may include a substance excreted from a living organism or a substance extracted from a living organism.
  • the specimen may include urine, blood, sweat, saliva, or nasal secretions.
  • the target substance may be a virus, a bacterium, deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA), ribonucleic acid (RNA), or a protein.
  • the reagent may include a substrate that reacts with the target substance or a nucleic acid or enzyme contained in the target substance.
  • the reagent may include a substrate that reacts with the target substance or a nucleic acid or enzyme contained in the target substance and emits fluorescence.
  • the reagent may include a probe DNA or a probe RNA designed to detect the target substance or a nucleic acid contained in the target substance.
  • the reagent may include a primer DNA or an enzyme for amplifying the target substance or a nucleic acid contained in the target substance.
  • the flow path substrate 1A has a rectangular parallelepiped shape.
  • the flow path substrate 1A may have a curved, spherical, concave, or convex surface in part.
  • the flow path substrate 1A may be located in whole or in part inside a housing made of resin, metal, or the like.
  • the flow path substrate 1A may be made of a single member.
  • the flow path substrate 1A may be made by combining two or more members.
  • the flow path substrate 1A has a flow path 10 therein.
  • the flow path substrate 1A has an inlet hole 11, a reagent dissolving section 12, a detection section 13, an outlet hole 14, and a branch section 15A.
  • the inlet hole 11, the reagent dissolving section 12, the detection section 13, the outlet hole 14, and the branch section 15A are part of the flow path 10.
  • the inlet hole 11 can introduce a specimen into the flow path substrate 1A.
  • the reagent dissolving section 12 is where the reagent is located and can dissolve the reagent in the specimen.
  • the detection section 13 can store the specimen mixed with the reagent.
  • the flow path substrate 1A has a plurality of detection sections 13.
  • the outlet hole 14 can discharge the specimen introduced from the inlet hole 11, which is introduced after the detection section 13 is filled, to the outside of the flow path substrate 1A.
  • the flow path substrate 1A has a plurality of outlet holes 14.
  • the branch section 15A branches the flow path 10 into a plurality of paths.
  • the following is an overview of detecting a target substance contained in a sample using the flow path substrate 1A.
  • the sample is introduced into the flow path from the introduction hole 11.
  • the sample moving through the flow path 10 is distributed to multiple branched flow paths at the branching section 15A.
  • the sample moving through each flow path is mixed with the reagent in the reagent dissolving section 12.
  • the sample mixed with the reagent in this manner is stored in the detection section 13.
  • the target substance is detected by observing the sample stored in the detection section 13.
  • the reagent may contain a substrate that reacts with the target substance and emits fluorescence.
  • the sample may be observed by irradiating the detection section 13 with excitation light.
  • the target substance may be detected based on the fluorescence emitted from the substrate in the sample.
  • the flow path substrate 1A further has a filter section 16 located between the introduction hole 11 and the branch section 15A.
  • the filter section 16 By having the filter section 16, the flow path substrate 1A can separate solids or air bubbles contained in the specimen. As a result, the risk that solids or air bubbles contained in the specimen will interfere with the detection of the target substance in the detection section 13 can be reduced.
  • the flow path substrate 1A has a first surface 17, which is the surface of the flow path substrate 1A, and a second surface 18 that faces the first surface 17.
  • the second surface 18 is the back surface of the flow path substrate 1A, opposite the first surface 17.
  • the top surface of the flow path 10 is the surface that is located on the first surface 17 side of the flow path 10.
  • the bottom surface of the flow path 10 is the surface that is located on the second surface 18 side of the flow path 10.
  • the side surface of the flow path 10 is the surface that is inclined with respect to the top surface and bottom surface of the flow path 10.
  • the material of the flow path substrate 1A may be resin, glass, ceramic, or metal.
  • the material of the flow path substrate 1A may be cyclic olefin polymer, cyclic olefin copolymer, acrylic resin, or unstretched polypropylene.
  • the flow path substrate 1A may be composed of a plurality of materials.
  • the flow path substrate 1A may be formed by injection molding, resin cutting, photolithography, or the like.
  • the cross section perpendicular to the first surface 17 of the flow path 10 has a rectangular shape.
  • the cross section perpendicular to the first surface 17 of the flow path 10 may have a shape such as an approximately circular shape, an elliptical shape, a trapezoidal shape, or a triangular shape.
  • the introduction hole 11 can introduce a specimen into the inside of the flow path substrate 1A.
  • the introduction hole 11 can introduce a specimen into the flow path 10.
  • the introduction hole 11 connects the outside of the flow path substrate 1A to the flow path 10.
  • the introduction hole 11 is one end of the flow path 10.
  • the introduction hole 11 opens into one of the faces of the flow path substrate 1A.
  • the introduction hole 11 opens into a first face 17 of the flow path substrate 1A.
  • the shape of the introduction hole 11 may be selected from any shape.
  • the space inside the introduction hole 11 has a truncated cone shape.
  • the space inside the introduction hole 11 may have a triangular pyramid shape, a square pyramid shape, a cylindrical shape, a square prism shape, or the like.
  • the introduction hole 11 has a shape in which the cross-sectional area of the introduction hole 11 decreases from the first surface 17 toward the second surface 18, which is opposite the first surface 17.
  • the opening of the introduction hole 11 is approximately circular.
  • the opening of the introduction hole 11 may be elliptical, rectangular, hexagonal, or octagonal.
  • the reagent dissolving section 12 can dissolve the reagent in the specimen.
  • the reagent dissolving section 12 can dissolve the reagent in the specimen flowing through the flow path.
  • the reagent is located on the bottom surface of the flow path.
  • the reagent may be located on the side surface of the flow path.
  • the reagent dissolving section 12 communicates with the flow path D155 of the branching section 15A on the side opposite to the flow path C154.
  • the shape of the reagent dissolving section 12 may be selected arbitrarily.
  • the reagent dissolving section 12 has a straight or curved shape.
  • the curved shape of the reagent dissolving section 12 may be an arc or L-shape.
  • the reagent dissolving section 12 of this embodiment has a shape in which arc shapes and straight shapes are repeated alternately.
  • the reagent dissolving section 12 does not have to have a curved shape.
  • the width of the flow path of the reagent dissolving section 12 is constant.
  • the width of the flow path of the reagent dissolving section 12 may change.
  • the width of the flow path of the reagent dissolving section 12 may be wider only in a portion.
  • the detection unit 13 can store a specimen.
  • the detection unit 13 can store a specimen mixed with a reagent.
  • the surface on the first surface 17 side and the surface on the second surface 18 side of the detection unit 13 may be translucent.
  • the detection unit 13 communicates with the flow path D155 of the branching unit 15A on the side opposite to the flow path C154.
  • the outlet hole 14 can lead the analyte from inside the flow path substrate 1A to the outside of the flow path substrate 1A.
  • the outlet hole 14 can lead the analyte from the flow path 10 to the outside of the flow path substrate 1A.
  • the outlet hole 14 is one end of the flow path of the flow path substrate 1A.
  • the outlet hole 14 opens to one of the faces of the flow path substrate 1A.
  • the outlet hole 14 opens to a first face 17 of the flow path substrate 1A.
  • the shape of the outlet hole 14 may be selected arbitrarily.
  • the space inside the outlet hole 14 has a truncated cone shape.
  • the space inside the outlet hole 14 may have a triangular pyramid shape, a square pyramid shape, a cylindrical shape, a square prism shape, or the like.
  • the outlet hole 14 has a shape in which the cross-sectional area of the outlet hole 14 decreases from the first surface 17 toward the second surface 18, which is opposite the first surface 17.
  • the opening of the outlet hole 14 is approximately circular in shape.
  • the opening of the outlet hole 14 may be a square shape, a hexagon shape, an octagon shape, or the like.
  • the branching section 15A branches the flow path of the flow path substrate 1A into a plurality of paths.
  • the branching section 15A branches the flow path of the flow path substrate 1A into four paths.
  • the number of paths to be branched is not limited to this, and can be set to any number.
  • the branching section 15A branches the flow path of the flow path substrate 1A to the left and right. "Branching the flow path to the left and right" refers to the flow path extending from the branching section 15A having a first flow path extending up and down, a second flow path extending to the right of the first flow path, and a third flow path extending to the left of the first flow path, but is not limited thereto.
  • tapping the flow path to the left and right also includes the case where the flow path extending from the branching section 15A has a first flow path extending to the left and right, a second flow path extending above the first flow path, and a third flow path extending below the first flow path.
  • the branching section 15A may be located between the introduction hole 11 and the detection section 13. In this embodiment, the branching section 15A is located between the introduction hole 11 and the reagent dissolving section 12. For example, the branching section 15A may be located between the reagent dissolving section 12 and the detection section 13.
  • the flow path substrate 1A can distribute the same sample to multiple locations within the flow path 10. This makes it possible to easily detect a target substance under multiple conditions.
  • the branching portion 15A has a flow path A151, a flow path B152, and a first branching wall 153.
  • the branching portion 15A has a plurality of flow paths B152.
  • the branching portion 15A has two flow paths B152.
  • the number of flow paths B152 that the branching portion 15A has is not limited to this, and can be set to any number.
  • the width of each of the multiple flow paths B152 is narrower than the width of flow path A151.
  • the ratio of the width of flow path A151 to the width of flow path B152 may be 0.800 or less.
  • the width and depth of flow path A151 and the width and depth of flow path B152 may be set to any value.
  • the width of flow path A151 may be 200 ⁇ m to 1000 ⁇ m.
  • the depth of flow path A151 may be 25 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m.
  • the width of flow path B152 may be 20.0 ⁇ m to 500 ⁇ m.
  • the depth of flow path B152 may be 25.0 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m.
  • the flow path A151 is a flow path connected to the liquid receiving section 41.
  • the flow path A151 can pass a specimen introduced from the introduction hole 11.
  • the flow path A151 is connected to the filter section 16.
  • the flow path A151 can pass a specimen that has flowed out from the filter section 16.
  • the width of the flow path A151 is constant.
  • the width of the flow path A151 may vary.
  • “thickness” refers to the cross-sectional area perpendicular to the extension direction of the flow path.
  • extension direction of the flow path refers to the direction in which the spaces formed by the flow paths are continuously located.
  • the “extension direction of the flow path” refers to the direction in which the fluid flows when the fluid is made to flow in the flow path, but is not limited to this.
  • the multiple flow paths B152 are flow paths of the multiple flow paths.
  • the flow path B152 is a flow path branched off from the flow path A151.
  • the flow path B152 can pass the specimen flowing out from the flow path A151.
  • the flow path B152 can pass a part of the specimen flowing out from the flow path A151.
  • the width of the flow path B152 is constant. The width of the flow path B152 may vary.
  • the multiple flow paths B152 are flow paths branched off from flow path A151 in a direction that does not overlap with a first virtual straight line that overlaps with flow path A151.
  • first virtual straight line that overlaps with flow path A151 refers to a straight line that extends from a point located within flow path A151 in the extension direction of flow path A151.
  • the multiple flow paths B152 are flow paths branched off to the left and right from flow path A151.
  • the thickness of the multiple flow paths B152 may be the same or different.
  • the sum of the thicknesses of the multiple flow paths B152 is smaller than the thickness of flow path A151.
  • the ratio of the thickness of flow path A151 to the sum of the thicknesses of flow paths B152 (sum of the thicknesses of flow paths B152/thickness of flow path A151) may be 0.900 or less.
  • the sum of the thicknesses of the multiple flow paths B152 is larger than the thickness of flow path C154.
  • the ratio of the thickness of flow path C154 to the sum of the thicknesses of flow paths B152 may be 1.50 or more.
  • the first branch wall 153 is located in the region where the multiple flow paths B152 branch off.
  • the first branch wall 153 is located between two flow paths B152.
  • the first branch wall 153 is connected to flow path B152.
  • the first branch wall 153 is continuous with the side surface of flow path B152.
  • the first branch wall 153 is a surface of the side surface of flow path 10 that is continuous with the side surface of flow path B152 and is located upstream of the inlet of flow path B152.
  • the first branch wall 153 is not continuous with the side surface of flow path A151.
  • the first branch wall 153 overlaps with a first virtual straight line that overlaps with the flow path A151.
  • the length of the first branch wall 153 is greater than the width of the flow path A151.
  • the length of the first branch wall 153 may be less than the width of the flow path A151.
  • the first branch wall 153 has a curved surface or a flat surface.
  • the first branch wall 153 in this embodiment has a flat surface and a curved surface.
  • the first branch wall 153 in this embodiment has a curved surface located between two flat surfaces.
  • the first branch wall 153 may have only two flat surfaces.
  • the first branch wall 153 may have only one curved surface.
  • the branching portion 15A further has a flow path C154.
  • the branching portion 15A has a plurality of flow paths C154.
  • the branching portion 15A has two flow paths C154.
  • the branching portion 15A has the same number of flow paths C154 as the plurality of flow paths B152.
  • the number of flow paths C154 that the branching portion 15A has may be different from the number of flow paths B152 that the branching portion 15A has.
  • Flow path C154 is connected to flow path B152. Each of the multiple flow paths C154 is connected to each of the multiple flow paths B152. Each of the multiple flow paths C154 may be connected to only a portion of the multiple flow paths B152. Flow path C154 is a flow path extending from flow path B152. Flow path C154 can pass a sample that has flowed out from flow path B152. Each of the multiple flow paths C154 can pass a sample that has flowed out from each of the multiple flow paths B152.
  • the thickness of flow path C154 may be thicker or thinner than that of flow path A151. In this embodiment, the thickness of flow path C154 is thinner than that of flow path A151. In this embodiment, the thickness of each of the multiple flow paths C154 is thinner than that of flow path A151. For example, the ratio of the thickness of flow path A151 to the thickness of flow path C154 (thickness of flow path C154/thickness of flow path A151) may be 0.600 or less. In this embodiment, the sum of the thicknesses of the multiple flow paths C154 is smaller than the thickness of flow path A151. For example, the ratio of the thickness of flow path A151 to the sum of the thicknesses of flow paths C154 (sum of the thicknesses of flow paths C154/thickness of flow path A151) may be 0.950 or less.
  • the thickness of flow path C154 may be thicker or thinner than the thickness of flow path B152. In this embodiment, the thickness of flow path C154 is thicker than the thickness of flow path B152. In this embodiment, the thickness of each of the multiple flow paths C154 is thicker than the thickness of each of the multiple flow paths B152. For example, the ratio of the thickness of flow path B152 to the thickness of flow path C154 (thickness of flow path C154/thickness of flow path B152) may be 1.05 or more.
  • the width of the flow path C154 may be 20.0 ⁇ m to 500 ⁇ m.
  • the depth of the flow path C154 may be 25.0 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m.
  • the width of the flow path C154 is constant.
  • the thickness of the flow path C154 may vary.
  • the thickness of the multiple flow paths C154 may be the same or different. In this embodiment, the thickness of the multiple flow paths C154 is the same.
  • the branching portion 15A further includes a flow path D155.
  • the flow path D155 is a flow path branched off from the flow path C154.
  • the flow path D155 can pass the specimen flowing out from the flow path C154.
  • the flow path D155 can pass a portion of the specimen flowing out from the flow path C154.
  • the branching section 15A has a plurality of flow paths D155.
  • the branching section 15A has four flow paths D155.
  • the number of flow paths D155 in the branching section 15A is not limited to this and can be set to any number.
  • the plurality of flow paths D155 are flow paths branched off from the flow path C154.
  • the plurality of flow paths D155 are flow paths branched off from the flow path C154 in a direction that does not overlap with a second imaginary line that overlaps with the flow path C154.
  • the "second imaginary line that overlaps with the flow path C154" refers to a line that extends from a point located within the flow path C154 in the extension direction of the flow path C154.
  • the plurality of flow paths D155 are flow paths branched off to the left and right from the flow path C154.
  • the width of flow path D155 may be thicker or thinner than the width of flow path A151. In this embodiment, the width of flow path D155 is thinner than the width of flow path A151. In this embodiment, the width of each of the multiple flow paths D155 is thinner than the width of flow path A151. For example, the ratio of the width of flow path A151 to the width of flow path D155 (width of flow path D155/width of flow path A151) may be 0.800 or less.
  • the width of flow path D155 may be thicker or thinner than that of flow path B152. In this embodiment, the width of flow path D155 is thinner than that of flow path B152. In this embodiment, the width of each of the multiple flow paths D155 is thinner than that of each of the multiple flow paths B152.
  • the ratio of the width of flow path A151 to the width of flow path D155 may be 0.980 or less.
  • the width of flow path D155 may be the same as that of flow path B152.
  • the width of flow path D155 may be thicker or thinner than the width of flow path C154. In this embodiment, the width of flow path D155 is thinner than the width of flow path C154. In this embodiment, the width of each of the multiple flow paths D155 is thinner than the width of flow path C154. For example, the ratio of the width of flow path C154 to the width of flow path D155 (width of flow path D155/width of flow path C154) may be 0.950 or less.
  • the width of the flow path D155 may be 20.0 ⁇ m to 500 ⁇ m.
  • the depth of the flow path D155 may be 25.0 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m.
  • the width of the flow path D155 is constant.
  • the width of the flow path D155 may vary.
  • the thickness of the multiple flow paths D155 may be the same or different. In this embodiment, the thickness of the multiple flow paths D155 is the same.
  • the sum of the lengths of the multiple flow paths B152 and the multiple flow paths C154 is smaller than the sum of the lengths of the flow paths A151.
  • the sum of the lengths of the multiple flow paths B152 and the multiple flow paths C154 is smaller than the sum of the lengths of the multiple flow paths D155 and the reagent dissolving section 12.
  • the angle formed by the two flow paths B152 is defined as the first angle.
  • the first angle may be, for example, 90.0 degrees or more.
  • the angles formed by adjacent flow paths D155 among the four flow paths D155 are defined as the second angle and the third angle.
  • the second angle and the third angle may be, for example, 90.0 degrees or less.
  • the first angle is greater than the second angle and the third angle.
  • the sum of the second angle and the third angle is greater than the first angle.
  • the second angle and the third angle may be the same angle or may be different angles.
  • the filter section 16 can separate solids or air bubbles contained in the sample.
  • the filter section 16 is located between the introduction hole 11 and the branching section 15A.
  • the filter section 16 may be located between the branching section 15A and the reagent dissolving section 12.
  • the filter section 16 has the thickest region in the flow channel 10.
  • the multiple flow paths B152 branch off from the flow path A151 in a direction that does not overlap with the first virtual straight line. Therefore, the risk that most of the specimen flowing out of the flow path A151 will directly flow into the flow path B152 is low.
  • the first branching wall 153 overlaps with the first virtual straight line. Therefore, most of the specimen flowing out of the flow path A151 will collide with the first branching wall 153 and then flow into each of the multiple flow paths B152. As a result, compared to when the first branching wall does not overlap with the first virtual straight line and when there is no first branching wall, the risk that the specimen will flow only into one of the multiple flow paths B152 can be reduced.
  • the width of each of the multiple flow paths B152 is narrower than the width of flow path A151. Therefore, resistance is generated when the sample flowing out of flow path A151 flows into any of the flow paths B152. As a result, the risk of the sample flowing into only one of the multiple flow paths B152 can be reduced compared to when the width of each of the multiple flow paths B is wider than the width of flow path A.
  • the multiple flow paths B152 branch off from the flow path A151 in a direction that does not overlap with the first virtual straight line.
  • the first branch wall 153 overlaps with the first virtual straight line.
  • the width of each of the multiple flow paths B152 is thinner than the width of the flow path A151.
  • the flow path substrate 2A is different from the flow path substrate 1A in the configuration of the branching section 25A. As shown in FIG. 17, the thicknesses of the multiple flow paths B252 are different. Of the two flow paths B252, one is thinner than the other. The thicknesses of the multiple flow paths D255 are different. Of the four flow paths D255, the thicknesses of the two flow paths D255 connected to one flow path B252 are thinner than the thicknesses of the two flow paths D255 connected to the other flow path B252.
  • the thicknesses of the two flow paths D255 connected to a flow path B252 thinner than one flow path B252 are thinner than the thicknesses of the two flow paths D255 connected to the other flow path B252.
  • the flow path substrate 3A is different from the flow path substrate 1A in the configuration of the branching section 35A. As shown in FIG. 18, the branching section 35A does not have a configuration corresponding to the flow path D155 and the second branching wall 157 in the flow path substrate 1A.
  • the branching section 35A has four flow paths C354. Of the four flow paths C354, two flow paths C354 are connected to one flow path B352A. In the flow path substrate 3A of this embodiment, it is also possible to facilitate the flow of the specimen into all of the flow paths B352A.
  • the flow path substrate 4A is different from the flow path substrate 1A in the configuration of the branching section 45E. As shown in FIG. 19, the branching section 45E does not have a configuration corresponding to the flow path C154 in the flow path substrate 1A.
  • the branching section 45E has a plurality of flow paths D455E branched from a plurality of flow paths B452E. In the branching section 45E, the flow path D455E branches from the flow path B452E.
  • the width of each of the plurality of flow paths D455E is thinner than the width of each of the plurality of flow paths B452E.
  • the flow path substrate 4A of this embodiment it is also possible to make it easier for the specimen to flow into all of the flow paths B452E. In addition, in the flow path substrate 4A of this embodiment, it is also possible to make it easier for the specimen to flow into all of the flow paths D455E.
  • the flow path substrate 5A is different from the flow path substrate 1A in the configuration of the branching section 55A. As shown in FIG. 20, in the branching section 55A, the multiple flow paths D555 are branched from only one flow path C554. The two flow paths D555 are branched from only one flow path C554. The multiple flow paths D555 are connected only to one flow path C554. The length of one flow path C554 is longer than the length of the other flow path C554. In the flow path substrate 5A of this embodiment, it is also possible to facilitate the flow of the specimen into all the flow paths B552.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Apparatus Associated With Microorganisms And Enzymes (AREA)

Abstract

This flow path substrate has a first flow path, a plurality of second flow paths, and a first branch wall. The plurality of second flow paths branch from the first flow path in a direction not overlapping a first imaginary straight line overlapping the first flow path. Each of the plurality of second flow paths is thinner than the first flow path. The first branch wall is located in a region where the plurality of second flow paths branch. The first branch wall is continuous with the second flow paths. The first branch wall overlaps the first imaginary straight line.

Description

流路基板、カートリッジ、検出システム、および、流路基板の製造方法Flow path substrate, cartridge, detection system, and method for manufacturing flow path substrate

 本開示は、流路基板等に関する。 This disclosure relates to flow path substrates, etc.

 特許文献1のマイクロ流路チップは、1つの液体導入口と、液体と反応する薬剤が配置される複数の反応部と、液体導入口に連通する複数の分配部と、各分配部及び各反応部に連通する流路と、を備える。 The microchannel chip of Patent Document 1 has one liquid inlet, multiple reaction sections in which chemicals that react with the liquid are placed, multiple distribution sections that communicate with the liquid inlet, and flow channels that communicate with each distribution section and each reaction section.

日本国特開2020-112383号公報Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2020-112383

 本開示の一態様に係る流路基板は、液体を受け入れる受液部と、前記受液部に接続する流路とを備え、前記流路は、プライマーを含む第1試薬が配置されている第1領域と、前記第1領域と異なる位置に核酸の増幅を行う酵素を含む第2試薬が配置されている第2領域とを有する。 The flow path substrate according to one embodiment of the present disclosure includes a liquid receiving section that receives a liquid and a flow path that is connected to the liquid receiving section, and the flow path has a first region in which a first reagent containing a primer is disposed, and a second region in which a second reagent containing an enzyme that amplifies nucleic acid is disposed at a position different from the first region.

 本開示の一態様に係る流路基板の製造方法は、基板に対して、液体を受け入れる受液部、および、前記受液部に接続する流路を形成する形成工程と、前記流路に、プライマーを含む第1試薬を配置する第1配置工程と、前記流路の前記第1領域と異なる位置に、核酸の増幅を行う酵素を含む第2試薬を配置する第2配置工程と、を含む。 The method for manufacturing a flow path substrate according to one embodiment of the present disclosure includes a forming step of forming a liquid receiving portion for receiving a liquid and a flow path connected to the liquid receiving portion on a substrate, a first disposing step of disposing a first reagent containing a primer in the flow path, and a second disposing step of disposing a second reagent containing an enzyme for amplifying nucleic acid in a position different from the first region of the flow path.

本開示の検出システムの一例を示す模式図である。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a detection system according to the present disclosure. 本開示のカートリッジの構成の一例を示す模式図、および、本開示のカートリッジの窓部を上方から見たときの模式図である。1A and 1B are schematic diagrams showing an example of a configuration of a cartridge of the present disclosure, and schematic diagrams showing a window portion of the cartridge of the present disclosure as viewed from above. 本開示のカートリッジおよび検出装置の使用例を説明するための模式図である。1A to 1C are schematic diagrams for explaining examples of use of the cartridge and detection device of the present disclosure. 本開示の検出システムの一例を示すブロック図である。FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a detection system of the present disclosure. 本開示のカートリッジの流路基板の一例を示す平面図である。1 is a plan view illustrating an example of a flow path substrate of a cartridge according to the present disclosure. 本開示の第1形態に係る流路基板が備える流路に配置される第1領域および第2領域の一例を示す模式図である。3 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a first region and a second region arranged in a flow channel provided in a flow channel substrate according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG. 本開示の第1形態に係る流路基板の製造方法の一例を示すフローチャートである。5 is a flowchart showing an example of a method for manufacturing a flow channel substrate according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure. 本開示の第1形態に係る流路基板が備える流路への試薬の塗布方法の一例を示す模式図である。5A to 5C are schematic diagrams showing an example of a method of applying a reagent to a flow channel provided in the flow channel substrate according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure. 試薬が塗布された流路の一例を示す平面模式図、および、流路への試薬の塗布方法の別例を示す模式図である。1A and 1B are schematic plan views showing an example of a flow channel to which a reagent is applied, and schematic views showing another example of a method of applying the reagent to the flow channel. 本開示の第2形態に係る流路基板の一例を示す平面図である。FIG. 11 is a plan view showing an example of a flow path substrate according to a second embodiment of the present disclosure. 本開示の第2形態に係る流路基板が備える流路における検出試薬の配置例を示す模式図である。13 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the arrangement of detection reagents in a flow channel provided in a flow channel substrate according to a second embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG. 本開示の第2形態に係る流路基板が備える複数の流路の使用例を説明するための模式図である。13A to 13C are schematic diagrams for explaining examples of use of a plurality of flow channels provided in a flow channel substrate according to a second embodiment of the present disclosure. 本開示の第2形態に係る流路基板4Bの製造方法の一例を示すフローチャートである。10 is a flowchart showing an example of a manufacturing method of a flow path substrate 4B according to a second embodiment of the present disclosure. 第3実施形態に係る流路基板の斜視図である。FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a flow path substrate according to a third embodiment. 第3実施形態に係る流路基板を図14のA-A線を含む面で切断した断面図である。15 is a cross-sectional view of the flow path substrate according to the third embodiment taken along a plane including line AA in FIG. 14. 第3実施形態に係る流路基板を図15の点線で囲まれた領域で拡大した部分拡大図である。16 is a partial enlarged view of a flow channel substrate according to a third embodiment, in a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 15 . 第4実施形態に係る流路基板を図16に対応する領域で拡大した部分拡大図である。17 is a partial enlarged view of a flow path substrate according to a fourth embodiment, in a region corresponding to FIG. 16 . 第5実施形態に係る流路基板を図16に対応する領域で拡大した部分拡大図である。17 is a partial enlarged view of a flow path substrate according to a fifth embodiment, in a region corresponding to FIG. 16 . 第6実施形態に係る流路基板を図16に対応する領域で拡大した部分拡大図である。17 is a partial enlarged view of a flow path substrate according to a sixth embodiment, in a region corresponding to FIG. 16 . 第7実施形態に係る流路基板を図16に対応する領域で拡大した部分拡大図である。17 is a partial enlarged view of a flow path substrate according to a seventh embodiment, in a region corresponding to that in FIG. 16 . 第1付着物の表面粗さおよび第2付着物の表面粗さを示す図である。FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the surface roughness of a first deposit and the surface roughness of a second deposit.

 本開示の一態様は、複数の流路に液体を導入するという簡単な操作により、複数の物質を検出対象とすることが可能な流路基板を実現する。本開示の一態様によれば、複数の流路に液体を導入するという簡単な操作により、複数の物質を検出対象とすることが可能となる。 One aspect of the present disclosure realizes a flow path substrate that can detect multiple substances by the simple operation of introducing liquid into multiple flow paths. According to one aspect of the present disclosure, it is possible to detect multiple substances by the simple operation of introducing liquid into multiple flow paths.

 〔検出システム〕
 図1は、本開示の検出システム1の一例を示す模式図である。図1は、カートリッジ2の外観の一例、および、検出装置3の外観の一例を示す模式図である。図2は、検出システム1の一例を示すブロック図である。図1に示すように、検出システム1は、カートリッジ2と検出装置3とを備えてよい。
[Detection System]
Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a detection system 1 of the present disclosure. Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the appearance of a cartridge 2 and an example of the appearance of a detection device 3. Fig. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the detection system 1. As shown in Fig. 1, the detection system 1 may include a cartridge 2 and a detection device 3.

 カートリッジ2は、被験者から採取した検体に含まれる検出対象を検出する検査キットである。カートリッジ2は、カートリッジ2に挿入された検体に検出対象が含まれている場合、試薬により検出対象由来の核酸を増幅させることが可能な検査キットであってよい。カートリッジ2は、本体部21とボトル部22とを備えていてよい。 The cartridge 2 is a test kit that detects a target substance contained in a specimen collected from a subject. The cartridge 2 may be a test kit that is capable of amplifying nucleic acid derived from the target substance using a reagent when the target substance is contained in a specimen inserted into the cartridge 2. The cartridge 2 may include a main body portion 21 and a bottle portion 22.

 被験者は、ヒトに限られず、ウイルスまたは細菌を有しうる生体であればよく、例えば、哺乳類、鳥類、爬虫類、両性類であってもよい。 The subject is not limited to humans, but may be any living organism capable of carrying a virus or bacteria, such as a mammal, bird, reptile, or amphibian.

 検体とは、被験者の身体から採取された唾液、尿、汗、鼻汁、血液、細胞などであってもよいし、例えば、地面、河川、海などの検査対象物から採取される土砂および水などであってよい。あるいは、検体は、手摺、扉、衣装、靴、便器などの検査対象物の表面から採取された付着物であってもよい。 The specimen may be saliva, urine, sweat, nasal mucus, blood, cells, etc. collected from the subject's body, or it may be soil and water collected from the object being tested, such as the ground, a river, or the sea. Alternatively, the specimen may be an attachment collected from the surface of the object being tested, such as a handrail, a door, clothing, shoes, or a toilet.

 検出対象は、例えばウイルスまたは細菌であってよい。検体が含むウイルスまたは細菌の種類は1種類に限定されず、2種類以上であってもよい。検出対象がウイルスである場合、ウイルスの種類としては、例えば、インフルエンザウイルス、コロナウイルス(例えば、SARS-CoV-2)、RSウイルス(Respiratory Syncytial Virus)、ヒトメタニューモウイルス、ノロウイルス、HIV(Human Immunodeficiency Virus)、ヘルペスウイルス、溶連菌、マイコプラズマ・ポミニスなどが挙げられる。 The detection target may be, for example, a virus or bacteria. The type of virus or bacteria contained in the sample is not limited to one type, and may be two or more types. When the detection target is a virus, examples of the types of virus include influenza virus, coronavirus (e.g., SARS-CoV-2), respiratory syncytial virus (RS virus), human metapneumovirus, norovirus, HIV (Human Immunoficiency Virus), herpes virus, streptococcus, and Mycoplasma pominis.

 ボトル部22には、被験者から採取した検体が収容されてよい。本体部21は、ボトル部22に収容された検体を含む液体を受け入れ、検体に検出対象が含まれている場合に、検出対象由来の核酸と反応する試薬を含む流路基板4(図5参照)を備えていてよい。詳細は後述するが、検出対象由来の核酸は、ボトル部22で抽出されてもよい。 The bottle portion 22 may contain a specimen collected from a subject. The main body portion 21 may be equipped with a flow path substrate 4 (see FIG. 5) that receives a liquid containing the specimen contained in the bottle portion 22 and contains a reagent that reacts with nucleic acid derived from the specimen when the specimen contains the target of detection. The nucleic acid derived from the target of detection may be extracted in the bottle portion 22, as will be described in detail later.

 検出装置3は、カートリッジ2において検出対象由来の核酸が増幅している場合に、当該核酸を検出する装置である。検出装置3は、カートリッジ2を受入可能な筐体を有していてよい。 The detection device 3 is a device that detects nucleic acid derived from the detection target when the nucleic acid is amplified in the cartridge 2. The detection device 3 may have a housing capable of receiving the cartridge 2.

 検出装置3は、検出対象由来の核酸が一定濃度以上存在するかを判定してもよい。検出装置3は、検出対象由来の核酸が一定濃度以上存在する場合、検体が陽性であると判定してもよい。または、検出装置3は、検出対象由来の核酸の濃度を測定する測定装置であってもよい。本実施形態では、検出装置3が、検体が陽性であるかを判定するものとして説明する。但し、検出装置3とは別の判定装置が、検出装置3が検出した核酸の量に対応するデータを検出装置3から取得することにより、検体が陽性であるかを判定してもよい。 The detection device 3 may determine whether a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present. The detection device 3 may determine that the sample is positive when a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present. Alternatively, the detection device 3 may be a measurement device that measures the concentration of nucleic acid derived from the detection target. In this embodiment, the detection device 3 is described as determining whether the sample is positive. However, a determination device separate from the detection device 3 may determine whether the sample is positive by obtaining data from the detection device 3 corresponding to the amount of nucleic acid detected by the detection device 3.

 カートリッジ2および検出装置3の具体的構成については後述する。 The specific configuration of the cartridge 2 and the detection device 3 will be described later.

 〔NASBA法〕
 流路基板4では、検出対象由来の核酸を、等温核酸増幅法により増幅させてよい。等温核酸増幅法としては、例えば、NASBA(Nucieic Acid Sequence-Based Amplification)法が挙げられる。その他、例えば、NEAR(Nicking Enzyme Amplification)法、LAMP(Loop-mediated Isothermal Amplification)法、および、TMA(Transcription mediated Amplification)法が挙げられる。本実施形態では、等温核酸増幅法として、NASBA法を用いてよい。
[NASBA Method]
In the flow path substrate 4, the nucleic acid derived from the detection target may be amplified by an isothermal nucleic acid amplification method. Examples of the isothermal nucleic acid amplification method include the Nucieic Acid Sequence-Based Amplification (NASBA) method. Other examples include the Nicking Enzyme Amplification (NEAR) method, the Loop-mediated Isothermal Amplification (LAMP) method, and the Transcription mediated Amplification (TMA) method. In this embodiment, the NASBA method may be used as the isothermal nucleic acid amplification method.

 NASBA法は、3種類の酵素(AMV逆転写酵素、RNase H、T7 RNApolymerase)と2種類のプライマーを用いた等温核酸増幅法である。NASBA法では、鋳型となるRNAにNASBA用の基質および酵素を加えるだけで、アンチセンス一本鎖RNAとして増幅される。NASBA反応の一連工程はすべて等温で進むため、複雑な温度制御を行うことなく、RNAの核酸増幅反応を行える。また、NASBA反応の増幅産物は、一本鎖RNAであるため、変性工程を経ることなく検出プローブを用いた配列特異的な検出を行うことができる。 The NASBA method is an isothermal nucleic acid amplification method that uses three types of enzymes (AMV reverse transcriptase, RNase H, and T7 RNA polymerase) and two types of primers. In the NASBA method, simply adding the NASBA substrate and enzymes to the template RNA results in amplified antisense single-stranded RNA. Since the entire series of steps in the NASBA reaction proceeds isothermally, the nucleic acid amplification reaction of RNA can be carried out without complex temperature control. In addition, since the amplified product of the NASBA reaction is single-stranded RNA, sequence-specific detection can be performed using a detection probe without going through a denaturation step.

 〔カートリッジの具体的構成〕
 図2の符号1101は、カートリッジ2の構成の一例を示す模式図である。図2の符号1102は、カートリッジ2の窓部211を上方から見たときの模式図である。図3は、カートリッジ2および検出装置3の使用例を説明するための模式図である。
[Specific configuration of the cartridge]
Reference numeral 1101 in Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of the cartridge 2. Reference numeral 1102 in Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of a window portion 211 of the cartridge 2 as viewed from above. Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of use of the cartridge 2 and the detection device 3.

 図2の符号1101に示すように、本体部21は、流路基板4を備えてよい。流路基板4は、液体を受け入れる受液部41を備えていてよい。また、図2の符号1102に示すように、流路基板4は、流路基板4内を流れた液体を貯留する貯留部46を備えていてよい。本体部21の筐体は、不透明な材質により構成されていてよい。この場合、本体部21の内部を視認可能なように、本体部21は窓部211を備えていてよい。 As shown by reference numeral 1101 in FIG. 2, the main body 21 may include a flow path substrate 4. The flow path substrate 4 may include a liquid receiving portion 41 that receives liquid. Also, as shown by reference numeral 1102 in FIG. 2, the flow path substrate 4 may include a storage portion 46 that stores liquid that has flowed through the flow path substrate 4. The housing of the main body 21 may be made of an opaque material. In this case, the main body 21 may include a window portion 211 so that the inside of the main body 21 can be seen.

 ボトル部22は、液体を収容可能な容器である。ボトル部22は、透明な材質により構成されていてよいが、不透明な材質により構成されていてもよい。 The bottle portion 22 is a container capable of holding liquid. The bottle portion 22 may be made of a transparent material, but may also be made of an opaque material.

 図2の符号1101において矢印で示すように、受液部41は、ボトル部22から流れ込んだ液体を受け入れる。受液部41が受け入れた液体は、流路基板4内に配置された流路45(図5参照)を流れた後、貯留部46に貯留される。流路45には試薬が配置されていてよい。また、図2の符号1102に示すように、貯留部46の近傍には、内部標準(標準部)47が設けられていてよい。内部標準47は貯留部46と光学的に比較するために用いられてもよい。 As shown by the arrow at 1101 in FIG. 2, the liquid receiving section 41 receives the liquid that has flowed in from the bottle section 22. The liquid received by the liquid receiving section 41 flows through a flow path 45 (see FIG. 5) arranged in the flow path substrate 4, and is then stored in the storage section 46. A reagent may be arranged in the flow path 45. Also, as shown at 1102 in FIG. 2, an internal standard (standard section) 47 may be provided near the storage section 46. The internal standard 47 may be used for optical comparison with the storage section 46.

 流路基板4は、流路45として流路45A~45Dの4つを備えてもよい(図5参照)。流路45A~45Dの少なくとも1つには、検体と、前記検体に含まれる検出対象と反応する標識物質と、を含む混合流体を流してもよい。内部標準47は、前記流路45とは異なる領域に位置し、検体および検体に含まれる検出対象と反応する標識物質を含む混合流体と比較するために用いられてもよい。例えば、内部標準47が発する光(例えば、蛍光)の強度と、検体および検体に含まれる検出対象と反応する標識物質が発する光(例えば、蛍光)の強度とが比較されてもよい。 The flow path substrate 4 may have four flow paths 45, 45A to 45D (see FIG. 5). A mixed fluid containing a sample and a labeling substance that reacts with the target substance contained in the sample may be flowed through at least one of the flow paths 45A to 45D. The internal standard 47 may be located in a region different from the flow path 45 and used for comparison with a mixed fluid containing the sample and the labeling substance that reacts with the target substance contained in the sample. For example, the intensity of light (e.g., fluorescence) emitted by the internal standard 47 may be compared with the intensity of light (e.g., fluorescence) emitted by the sample and the labeling substance that reacts with the target substance contained in the sample.

 図2の符号1102に示すように、本体部21には、窓部211を上方から見たときに、窓部211を介して、流路基板4に配置された貯留部46および内部標準47を視認できるように、窓部211が形成されている。流路基板4が複数の貯留部46および複数の内部標準47を備えている場合、全ての貯留部46および全ての内部標準47が視認できるように、窓部211が形成されていてよい。言い換えると、貯留部46および内部標準47は、窓部211から光学的に露出するように本体部21に配置されていてよい。 As shown by reference numeral 1102 in FIG. 2, the main body 21 is formed with a window 211 so that the storage sections 46 and internal standards 47 arranged on the flow path substrate 4 can be seen through the window 211 when viewed from above. When the flow path substrate 4 has multiple storage sections 46 and multiple internal standards 47, the window 211 may be formed so that all of the storage sections 46 and all of the internal standards 47 can be seen. In other words, the storage sections 46 and the internal standards 47 may be arranged on the main body 21 so as to be optically exposed from the window 211.

 図3の符号1112に示すように、本体部21には、サンプラー23が取り付けられていてよい。サンプラー23は、検体採取部231と固定部232とを備えていてよい。検体採取部231は、検体を採取する部分である。検体採取部231は、例えば襞状の樹脂製部材であってよい。固定部232は、サンプラー23がボトル部22に挿入された状態において、ボトル部22を本体部21に固定してよい。本体部21とボトル部22との接続部分は、例えばネジ構造となっていてよい。また、ボトル部22の、本体部21との接続部分には、蓋が設けられていてよい。これにより、ボトル部22の内部を封止できる。蓋はアルミ製であってよい。被験者は、蓋を取り外してサンプラー23をボトル部22に挿入してよい。 As shown by reference numeral 1112 in FIG. 3, the sampler 23 may be attached to the main body 21. The sampler 23 may include a specimen collection section 231 and a fixing section 232. The specimen collection section 231 is a section for collecting a specimen. The specimen collection section 231 may be, for example, a pleated resin member. The fixing section 232 may fix the bottle section 22 to the main body 21 when the sampler 23 is inserted into the bottle section 22. The connection section between the main body 21 and the bottle section 22 may have, for example, a screw structure. In addition, a lid may be provided at the connection section of the bottle section 22 with the main body 21. This allows the inside of the bottle section 22 to be sealed. The lid may be made of aluminum. The subject may remove the lid and insert the sampler 23 into the bottle section 22.

 図3の符号1111に示すように、例えば検体として唾液を採取する場合、被験者は、検体採取部231を被験者の口の中に挿入することにより、検体採取部231に唾液を付着させる。図3の符号1112に示すように、被験者は、検体採取部231に唾液を付着させた後、サンプラー23をボトル部22に挿入する。 As shown by reference numeral 1111 in FIG. 3, when collecting saliva as a sample, for example, the subject inserts the sample collection portion 231 into the subject's mouth, thereby attaching saliva to the sample collection portion 231. As shown by reference numeral 1112 in FIG. 3, the subject attaches saliva to the sample collection portion 231, and then inserts the sampler 23 into the bottle portion 22.

 ボトル部22には、緩衝液24が収容されていてよい。緩衝液24としては、例えば、NASBA溶解液が挙げられる。緩衝液24には、例えば、界面活性剤、および、RNA(Ribonucleic acid)分解酵素阻害剤が含まれていてもよい。但し、RNA分解酵素阻害剤は、流路基板4に配置されてもよい。この場合、緩衝液24にRNA分解酵素阻害剤が含まれていなくてよい。界面活性剤としては、例えば、非イオン性界面活性剤の一例であるTween-20(ポリソルベート20)が挙げられる。非イオン性界面活性剤が緩衝液24に含まれる場合、検体と緩衝液24とが混合されることで、ボトル部22において検出対象由来の核酸を抽出することができる。 The bottle portion 22 may contain a buffer solution 24. An example of the buffer solution 24 is a NASBA dissolving solution. The buffer solution 24 may contain, for example, a surfactant and an RNA (Ribonucleic acid) degrading enzyme inhibitor. However, the RNA degrading enzyme inhibitor may be disposed on the flow path substrate 4. In this case, the buffer solution 24 may not contain an RNA degrading enzyme inhibitor. An example of a surfactant is Tween-20 (polysorbate 20), which is an example of a non-ionic surfactant. When a non-ionic surfactant is contained in the buffer solution 24, the sample and the buffer solution 24 are mixed, and nucleic acid derived from the detection target can be extracted in the bottle portion 22.

 被験者がサンプラー23をボトル部22に挿入すると、検体採取部231に付着した唾液は、緩衝液24と混合される。検体が混合された緩衝液24は、ボトル部22が収容可能な液体の一例であってよい。 When the subject inserts the sampler 23 into the bottle portion 22, the saliva adhering to the specimen collection portion 231 is mixed with the buffer solution 24. The buffer solution 24 mixed with the specimen may be an example of a liquid that can be contained in the bottle portion 22.

 図3の符号1113に示すように、検出装置3は、カートリッジ2を受入可能な受入部36を備えていてよい。図3の符号1113に示すように、被験者は、検体を収容したカートリッジ2を受入部36に装着した後、図3の符号1114に示すように、検出装置3の上下を反転させる。これにより、検体が混合した緩衝液24は、その自重により、サンプラー23を伝って、本体部21が備える流路基板4に流れ込む。検体が混合した緩衝液24は、受液部41が受け入れる液体の一例であってよい。 As shown by reference numeral 1113 in FIG. 3, the detection device 3 may include a receiving section 36 capable of receiving the cartridge 2. As shown by reference numeral 1113 in FIG. 3, the subject attaches the cartridge 2 containing the sample to the receiving section 36, and then turns the detection device 3 upside down, as shown by reference numeral 1114 in FIG. 3. As a result, the buffer solution 24 mixed with the sample flows under its own weight through the sampler 23 into the flow path substrate 4 provided in the main body section 21. The buffer solution 24 mixed with the sample may be an example of a liquid received by the liquid receiving section 41.

 ネガティブコントロールとして流路基板4に緩衝液24のみを流し込ませてもよい。この場合、緩衝液24自体が、ボトル部22が収容可能な液体の一例であり、受液部41が受け入れる液体の一例となる。また、検出対象以外の病原体を含む物質を緩衝液24に混合させてもよい。この場合、当該物質を混合した緩衝液24が、ボトル部22が収容可能な液体の一例であり、受液部41が受け入れる液体の一例であってよい。 As a negative control, only the buffer solution 24 may be poured into the flow path substrate 4. In this case, the buffer solution 24 itself is an example of a liquid that can be accommodated by the bottle portion 22, and an example of a liquid that can be received by the liquid receiving portion 41. Also, a substance that contains a pathogen other than the detection target may be mixed into the buffer solution 24. In this case, the buffer solution 24 mixed with the substance is an example of a liquid that can be accommodated by the bottle portion 22, and an example of a liquid that can be received by the liquid receiving portion 41.

 〔検出装置の具体的構成〕
 図4は、検出システム1の一例を示すブロック図である。図4に示すように、検出装置3は、流路基板4が備える流路45内で増幅された核酸を検出する装置であってよい。検出装置3は、例えば、加熱部31と、加圧部32と、光照射部33と、撮像部34と、制御部35とを備えていてよい。
[Specific configuration of the detection device]
Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the detection system 1. As shown in Fig. 4, the detection device 3 may be a device that detects nucleic acid amplified in a flow channel 45 provided in the flow channel substrate 4. The detection device 3 may include, for example, a heating unit 31, a pressurizing unit 32, a light irradiating unit 33, an imaging unit 34, and a control unit 35.

 加熱部31は、検出装置3に挿入されたカートリッジ2を加熱する部材であってよい。加熱部31は、流路基板4において核酸と試薬との反応が促進する温度により、カートリッジ2を加熱してよい。NASBA法による核酸の増幅を行う場合、加熱部31は、37℃~41℃の温度により、カートリッジ2を加熱してよい。本実施形態では、加熱部31は、最初に80℃~95℃の温度で3~10分間、カートリッジ2を加熱する。これにより、病原体が破砕され、病原体から核酸成分を遊離させることができる。また、DNA(deoxyribonucleic acid)分解酵素を失活させることができる。その後、加熱部31は、カートリッジ2を37℃~41℃の温度に維持してよい。 The heating unit 31 may be a member that heats the cartridge 2 inserted into the detection device 3. The heating unit 31 may heat the cartridge 2 to a temperature that promotes the reaction between the nucleic acid and the reagent in the flow path substrate 4. When amplifying nucleic acid by the NASBA method, the heating unit 31 may heat the cartridge 2 to a temperature of 37°C to 41°C. In this embodiment, the heating unit 31 first heats the cartridge 2 at a temperature of 80°C to 95°C for 3 to 10 minutes. This breaks down the pathogens and allows the nucleic acid components to be released from the pathogens. It also deactivates the DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid) decomposing enzyme. The heating unit 31 may then maintain the cartridge 2 at a temperature of 37°C to 41°C.

 加熱部31は、カートリッジ2の部位毎に異なる温度で加熱してもよい。例えば、加熱部31は、ボトル部22を80℃~95℃の温度で加熱する第1加熱部を有し、本体部21を37℃~41℃の温度で加熱する第2加熱部を有してもよい。これにより、ボトル部22において病原体が破砕され、病原体から核酸成分を遊離させることができる。また、ボトル部22においてDNA分解酵素を失活させることができる。その後、ボトル部22内の液体は、37℃~41℃の温度に維持された本体部21が備える流路基板4に流れ込み、流路基板4において核酸の増幅が行われてよい。 The heating unit 31 may heat each part of the cartridge 2 at a different temperature. For example, the heating unit 31 may have a first heating unit that heats the bottle portion 22 at a temperature of 80°C to 95°C, and a second heating unit that heats the main body portion 21 at a temperature of 37°C to 41°C. This allows the pathogens to be crushed in the bottle portion 22, and nucleic acid components to be liberated from the pathogens. Also, the DNA degrading enzyme can be inactivated in the bottle portion 22. The liquid in the bottle portion 22 then flows into the flow path substrate 4 provided in the main body portion 21, which is maintained at a temperature of 37°C to 41°C, and the nucleic acid may be amplified in the flow path substrate 4.

 加熱部31が加熱する温度は、加熱部31の設定温度であってよい。あるいは、加熱部31によって温度調節される対象の液体の液温であってもよい。加熱部31が加熱する温度が加熱部31によって温度調節される対象の液体の液温である場合、例えば、液体の平均温度または中心温度を用いてもよい。ここで、平均温度は、例えば、所定時間における液温の平均であってもよい。中心温度は、例えば、液温の最高値と最低値との中心の温度であってもよい。中心温度は、最高温度と最低温度との和を2で割った値として算出され得る。検出装置3は、加熱部31によって温度調節される対象の液体の液温を検出する温度センサを備えていてもよい。加熱部31は、温度センサが検出した液温を維持するように、温度センサが液温を検出対象とする液体を加熱してもよい。 The temperature to which the heating unit 31 heats may be the set temperature of the heating unit 31. Alternatively, it may be the liquid temperature of the liquid to be temperature-adjusted by the heating unit 31. When the temperature to which the heating unit 31 heats is the liquid temperature of the liquid to be temperature-adjusted by the heating unit 31, for example, the average temperature or central temperature of the liquid may be used. Here, the average temperature may be, for example, the average of the liquid temperature over a predetermined time. The central temperature may be, for example, the temperature at the center between the maximum and minimum liquid temperatures. The central temperature may be calculated as the sum of the maximum and minimum temperatures divided by 2. The detection device 3 may be equipped with a temperature sensor that detects the liquid temperature of the liquid to be temperature-adjusted by the heating unit 31. The heating unit 31 may heat the liquid whose temperature is to be detected by the temperature sensor so as to maintain the liquid temperature detected by the temperature sensor.

 加圧部32は、検出装置3に挿入されたカートリッジ2のボトル部22を加圧する部材であってよい。検出装置3が加圧部32によりボトル部22を加圧する構成の場合、ボトル部22は、加圧部32の加圧により変形する材質であってよい。加圧部32の加圧によりボトル部22が変形することにより、ボトル部22内の液体を本体部21に流れ込みやすくできる。 The pressurizing unit 32 may be a member that pressurizes the bottle portion 22 of the cartridge 2 inserted into the detection device 3. When the detection device 3 is configured to pressurize the bottle portion 22 using the pressurizing unit 32, the bottle portion 22 may be made of a material that is deformed by the pressurization of the pressurizing unit 32. The bottle portion 22 is deformed by the pressurization of the pressurizing unit 32, which makes it easier for the liquid in the bottle portion 22 to flow into the main body portion 21.

 加圧部32は、ボトル部22の側面の少なくとも一部を加圧する部材であってよい。加圧部32は、ボトル部22の側面を挟持する部材であってよい。加圧部32は、検出装置3において、例えば、ボトル部22の底部側の側面を加圧できる位置に配置されていてよい。 The pressurizing unit 32 may be a member that pressurizes at least a portion of the side of the bottle portion 22. The pressurizing unit 32 may be a member that clamps the side of the bottle portion 22. The pressurizing unit 32 may be disposed in a position in the detection device 3 where it can pressurize the side of the bottom side of the bottle portion 22, for example.

 光照射部33は、本体部21の窓部211を介して、流路基板4の貯留部46および内部標準47に光を照射する光源であってよい。光照射部33は、例えば、貯留部46および内部標準47に励起光を照射する。 The light irradiation unit 33 may be a light source that irradiates light onto the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47 of the flow path substrate 4 through the window 211 of the main body 21. The light irradiation unit 33 irradiates, for example, excitation light onto the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47.

 流路基板4の流路45には、流路45内において増幅された核酸と特異的に結合する標識物質が配置されていてよい。標識物質は光学的に観察可能なものであればよく、例えば、色素、発光物質または蛍光物質を有していてもよいがこれに限られない。標識物質が蛍光物質である場合、貯留部46に励起光が照射されたとき、核酸に結合した標識物質は、特定の波長を有する蛍光を発する。 The flow channel 45 of the flow channel substrate 4 may be provided with a labeling substance that specifically binds to the nucleic acid amplified within the flow channel 45. The labeling substance may be optically observable, and may be, for example, but is not limited to, a dye, a luminescent substance, or a fluorescent substance. If the labeling substance is a fluorescent substance, when the storage section 46 is irradiated with excitation light, the labeling substance bound to the nucleic acid emits fluorescence having a specific wavelength.

 標識物質が含む蛍光物質としては、例えば、6-caroxyfluorescein(FAM)、テキサスレッド(TR)(登録商標)、シアニン(CY)系材料などが挙げられる。蛍光物質が6-FAMである場合、ピーク波長494nmの励起光の照射により、ピーク波長517nmの蛍光を発する。蛍光物質がテキサスレッドである場合、ピーク波長596nmの励起光の照射により、ピーク波長615nmの蛍光を発する。蛍光物質がCy3-carboxylic
 acidである場合、ピーク波長555nmの励起光の照射により、ピーク波長570nmの蛍光を発する。
Examples of fluorescent substances contained in the labeling substance include 6-caroxyfluorescein (FAM), Texas Red (TR) (registered trademark), and cyanine (CY)-based materials. When the fluorescent substance is 6-FAM, it emits fluorescence with a peak wavelength of 517 nm when irradiated with excitation light with a peak wavelength of 494 nm. When the fluorescent substance is Texas Red, it emits fluorescence with a peak wavelength of 615 nm when irradiated with excitation light with a peak wavelength of 596 nm. When the fluorescent substance is Cy3-carboxylic
In the case of an acid, it emits fluorescence with a peak wavelength of 570 nm when irradiated with excitation light with a peak wavelength of 555 nm.

 標識物質としては、例えば、モレキュラービーコンであってよい。モレキュラービーコンはプローブDNAの一種である。プローブDNAの各分子は、蛍光分子および消光分子によって修飾されている。消光分子は、例えば、蛍光分子の蛍光波長に対応する波長帯の光を吸収するように設定されている。酵素により増幅された核酸分子と結合していないプローブDNAにおける、蛍光分子と消光分子との間の距離は、酵素により増幅された核酸分子と結合したプローブDNAにおける、蛍光分子と消光分子との間の距離より近い。プローブDNAの塩基配列は、検出対象となる核酸の塩基配列に基づいて適宜設計されればよい。 The labeling substance may be, for example, a molecular beacon. A molecular beacon is a type of probe DNA. Each molecule of the probe DNA is modified with a fluorescent molecule and a quenching molecule. The quenching molecule is set to absorb light in a wavelength band corresponding to the fluorescence wavelength of the fluorescent molecule, for example. The distance between the fluorescent molecule and the quenching molecule in the probe DNA that is not bound to the nucleic acid molecule amplified by the enzyme is closer than the distance between the fluorescent molecule and the quenching molecule in the probe DNA that is bound to the nucleic acid molecule amplified by the enzyme. The base sequence of the probe DNA may be appropriately designed based on the base sequence of the nucleic acid to be detected.

 内部標準47は貯留部46と光学的に比較するものであればよく、内部標準47として、例えば、色素、発光物質または蛍光物質が配置されていてもよいがこれに限られない。内部標準47として、励起光が照射されたときに蛍光を発する蛍光物質が配置されてよい。内部標準47としての蛍光物質と、標識物質が含む蛍光物質とは同種の蛍光物質であってよい。 The internal standard 47 may be anything that can be optically compared with the storage section 46, and may be, for example, but is not limited to, a dye, a luminescent substance, or a fluorescent substance. The internal standard 47 may be a fluorescent substance that emits fluorescence when irradiated with excitation light. The fluorescent substance as the internal standard 47 and the fluorescent substance contained in the labeling substance may be the same type of fluorescent substance.

 撮像部34は、本体部21の窓部211を介して、貯留部46および内部標準47を撮像する部材である。撮像部34が貯留部46を撮像することにより、貯留部46に存在する標識物質から測定される光学情報に基づき、貯留部46に貯留された液体に検出対象由来の核酸が一定濃度以上存在するかを判定してよい。光学情報は、例えば、色素、発光物質又は蛍光物質から得られる情報であってよい。光学情報は、例えば波長、輝度値等の情報であってよい。例えば、制御部35は、貯留部46から発せられる蛍光の強度に基づき、貯留部46に貯留された液体に検出対象由来の核酸が一定濃度以上存在するかを判定してよい。 The imaging unit 34 is a member that images the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47 through the window 211 of the main body 21. By imaging the storage unit 46, the imaging unit 34 may determine whether or not a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present in the liquid stored in the storage unit 46 based on optical information measured from the labeling substance present in the storage unit 46. The optical information may be, for example, information obtained from a dye, a luminescent substance, or a fluorescent substance. The optical information may be, for example, information such as wavelength or brightness value. For example, the control unit 35 may determine whether a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present in the liquid stored in the storage unit 46 based on the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the storage unit 46.

 また、撮像部34が内部標準47を撮像することにより、内部標準47から測定される光学情報に基づき、撮像画像における内部標準47の位置を特定してよい。光学情報は、例えば、色素、発光物質または蛍光物質から得られる情報であってよい。光学情報は、例えば波長、輝度値等の情報であってよい。例えば、制御部35は、内部標準47から発せられる蛍光に基づき、撮像画像における内部標準47の位置を特定してよい。そして、制御部35は、特定した内部標準47の位置に基づき、撮像画像における流路45の位置を特定してもよい。 Furthermore, the imaging unit 34 may image the internal standard 47, and identify the position of the internal standard 47 in the captured image based on optical information measured from the internal standard 47. The optical information may be, for example, information obtained from a dye, a luminescent substance, or a fluorescent substance. The optical information may be, for example, information such as wavelength or brightness value. For example, the control unit 35 may identify the position of the internal standard 47 in the captured image based on the fluorescence emitted from the internal standard 47. The control unit 35 may then identify the position of the flow path 45 in the captured image based on the identified position of the internal standard 47.

 さらに、撮像部34が内部標準47を撮像した画像を解析することにより、内部標準47から所定値以上の光学情報を測定できるかを判定してもよい。制御部35は、所定値以上の光学情報を測定できた場合に、撮像部34が正常に動作していると判定してもよい。例えば、制御部35は、内部標準47から所定の強度以上の蛍光を受光できているかを判定してもよい。制御部35は、所定の強度以上の蛍光を受光できた場合に、撮像部34が正常に動作していると判定してもよい。 Furthermore, the image capturing unit 34 may analyze the image of the internal standard 47 to determine whether optical information of a predetermined value or more can be measured from the internal standard 47. The control unit 35 may determine that the image capturing unit 34 is operating normally if optical information of a predetermined value or more can be measured. For example, the control unit 35 may determine that fluorescence of a predetermined intensity or more can be received from the internal standard 47. The control unit 35 may determine that the image capturing unit 34 is operating normally if fluorescence of a predetermined intensity or more can be received.

 所定値以上の光学情報が測定できているかの判定は、検出装置3を起動させた後、検体から得られる光学情報を測定する前に一度行われればよい。例えば、所定の強度以上の蛍光を受光できているかの判定、すなわち所定の蛍光強度の測定は、検出装置3を起動させた後、検体が発する蛍光の強度を測定する前に一度行われればよい。 The determination of whether optical information equal to or greater than a predetermined value has been measured may be performed once after starting the detection device 3 and before measuring the optical information obtained from the specimen. For example, the determination of whether fluorescence equal to or greater than a predetermined intensity has been received, i.e., the measurement of the predetermined fluorescence intensity, may be performed once after starting the detection device 3 and before measuring the intensity of the fluorescence emitted by the specimen.

 制御部35は、検出装置3が備える各部材を統括して制御してよい。制御部35は、例えば、強度測定部351と陽性判定部352とを備えていてよい。 The control unit 35 may comprehensively control each component of the detection device 3. The control unit 35 may include, for example, an intensity measurement unit 351 and a positive determination unit 352.

 強度測定部351は、貯留部46および内部標準47に含まれる物質から光学情報を測定してよい。例えば、強度測定部351は、貯留部46および内部標準47に含まれる物質が励起光を受けて発する蛍光の強度を測定してよい。 The intensity measurement unit 351 may measure optical information from the substances contained in the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47. For example, the intensity measurement unit 351 may measure the intensity of the fluorescence emitted by the substances contained in the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47 upon receiving excitation light.

 制御部35は、まず、光照射部33を制御して、貯留部46および内部標準47に光を照射してよい。その状態において、制御部35は、撮像部34を制御して、貯留部46および内部標準47を含む画像を撮像してよい。強度測定部351は、撮像部34が撮像した画像を解析して輝度を、貯留部46および内部標準47に含まれる物質から得られる光学情報として測定してよい。 The control unit 35 may first control the light irradiation unit 33 to irradiate the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47 with light. In this state, the control unit 35 may control the imaging unit 34 to capture an image including the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47. The intensity measurement unit 351 may analyze the image captured by the imaging unit 34 and measure the brightness as optical information obtained from the substances contained in the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47.

 例えば、制御部35は、光照射部33を制御して、貯留部46および内部標準47に励起光を照射した後、撮像部34が撮像した画像を解析して輝度を取得する。これにより、制御部35は、貯留部46および内部標準47に含まれる物質が発する蛍光の強度をそれぞれ測定してよい。 For example, the control unit 35 controls the light irradiation unit 33 to irradiate the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47 with excitation light, and then analyzes the image captured by the imaging unit 34 to obtain the luminance. As a result, the control unit 35 may measure the intensity of the fluorescence emitted by the substances contained in the storage unit 46 and the internal standard 47, respectively.

 強度測定部351は、試薬が配置された流路45に接続された貯留部46から得られた光学情報を、検出対象の光学情報として測定してよい。例えば、強度測定部351は、試薬が配置された流路45に接続された貯留部46から発せられた蛍光の強度を、検出対象の蛍光の強度として測定してよい。また、強度測定部351は、ネガティブコントロール用の流路45に接続された貯留部46から発せられた光学情報を、ネガティブコントロールの光学情報として測定してよい。例えば、強度測定部351は、ネガティブコントロール用の流路45に接続された貯留部46から発せられた蛍光の強度を、ネガティブコントロールの蛍光の強度として測定してよい。ネガティブコントロール用の流路45については後述する。試薬が配置された流路45の位置、および、ネガティブコントロール用の流路45の位置は、予め決められていてよい。 The intensity measuring unit 351 may measure the optical information obtained from the storage unit 46 connected to the flow path 45 in which the reagent is placed as the optical information of the detection target. For example, the intensity measuring unit 351 may measure the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the storage unit 46 connected to the flow path 45 in which the reagent is placed as the intensity of the fluorescence of the detection target. The intensity measuring unit 351 may also measure the optical information emitted from the storage unit 46 connected to the flow path 45 for the negative control as the optical information of the negative control. For example, the intensity measuring unit 351 may measure the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the storage unit 46 connected to the flow path 45 for the negative control as the intensity of the fluorescence of the negative control. The flow path 45 for the negative control will be described later. The position of the flow path 45 in which the reagent is placed and the position of the flow path 45 for the negative control may be determined in advance.

 陽性判定部352は、強度測定部351が測定した貯留部46から得られた光学情報に基づき、貯留部46に貯留する液体に含まれる検体に、検出対象由来の核酸が一定濃度以上存在するかを判定してよい。例えば、陽性判定部352は、強度測定部351が測定した貯留部46から発せられた蛍光の強度に基づき、貯留部46に貯留する液体に含まれる検体に、検出対象由来の核酸が一定濃度以上存在するかを判定してよい。陽性判定部352は、検出対象由来の核酸が一定濃度以上存在すると判定した場合、検体が陽性であると判定してよい。 The positive determination unit 352 may determine whether or not a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present in the sample contained in the liquid stored in the storage unit 46 based on the optical information obtained from the storage unit 46 measured by the intensity measurement unit 351. For example, the positive determination unit 352 may determine whether a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present in the sample contained in the liquid stored in the storage unit 46 based on the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the storage unit 46 measured by the intensity measurement unit 351. If the positive determination unit 352 determines that a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present, it may determine that the sample is positive.

 例えば、陽性判定部352は、貯留部46から得られた光学情報が示す値と閾値とを比較することにより、検出対象由来の核酸が一定濃度以上存在するかを判定してよい。例えば、閾値は、陽性と判定すべき検出対象由来の核酸の最小濃度に対応付けられた光学情報であってよい。閾値は、実験等により予め設定されていてよい。例えば、陽性判定部352は、貯留部46から発せられた蛍光の強度と、閾値とを比較することにより、検出対象由来の核酸が一定濃度以上存在するかを判定してよい。 For example, the positive determination unit 352 may determine whether a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present by comparing the value indicated by the optical information obtained from the storage unit 46 with a threshold value. For example, the threshold value may be optical information associated with the minimum concentration of nucleic acid derived from the detection target that should be determined as positive. The threshold value may be set in advance through experiments, etc. For example, the positive determination unit 352 may determine whether a certain concentration or more of nucleic acid derived from the detection target is present by comparing the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the storage unit 46 with the threshold value.

 陽性判定部352は、検出対象の光学情報が示す値から、ネガティブコントロールの光学情報が示す値を引いた値を、差分値として算出してよい。例えば、陽性判定部352は、検出対象の蛍光の強度から、ネガティブコントロールの蛍光の強度を引いた値を、差分値として算出してよい。陽性判定部352は、差分値と閾値とを比較し、差分値が閾値以上である場合には検体が陽性であると判定し、差分値が閾値未満である場合には検体が陰性であると判定してよい。 The positive determination unit 352 may calculate a difference value by subtracting the value indicated by the optical information of the negative control from the value indicated by the optical information of the detection target. For example, the positive determination unit 352 may calculate a difference value by subtracting the fluorescence intensity of the negative control from the fluorescence intensity of the detection target. The positive determination unit 352 may compare the difference value with a threshold value, and determine that the sample is positive if the difference value is equal to or greater than the threshold value, and determine that the sample is negative if the difference value is less than the threshold value.

 その他、陽性判定部352は、上記差分値を、内部標準47から得られた光学情報が示す値と比較することにより、検体が陽性であるかを判定してもよい。例えば、互いに濃度が異なる2つの内部標準47を配置していてもよい。陽性判定部352は、2つの内部標準47から得られる光学情報が示す値の範囲内に上記差分値がある場合、検体が陽性であると判定してよい。2つの内部標準47から得られる光学情報は、陽性と判定すべき検出対象由来の核酸の濃度に対応付けられた光学情報であってよい。2つの内部標準47から得られる光学情報は、実験等により予め設定されていてよい。 In addition, the positive determination unit 352 may determine whether the sample is positive by comparing the difference value with a value indicated by optical information obtained from the internal standard 47. For example, two internal standards 47 having different concentrations may be arranged. The positive determination unit 352 may determine that the sample is positive if the difference value is within the range of values indicated by the optical information obtained from the two internal standards 47. The optical information obtained from the two internal standards 47 may be optical information associated with the concentration of the nucleic acid derived from the detection target that should be determined to be positive. The optical information obtained from the two internal standards 47 may be set in advance by experiments, etc.

 例えば、陽性判定部352は、上記差分値を、内部標準47から発せられた蛍光の強度と比較することにより、検体が陽性であるかを判定してもよい。陽性判定部352は、2つの内部標準47が示す蛍光の強度の範囲内に上記差分値がある場合、検体が陽性であると判定してよい。 For example, the positive determination unit 352 may determine whether the sample is positive by comparing the difference value with the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the internal standard 47. If the difference value is within the range of the fluorescence intensities indicated by the two internal standards 47, the positive determination unit 352 may determine that the sample is positive.

 また、制御部35は、複数の内部標準47から得られる光学情報に基づき、検量線を作成してもよい。例えば、制御部35は、複数の内部標準47が発する蛍光の強度に基づき、検量線を作成してもよい。この場合、制御部35は、検量線を用いて上記差分値に対応する核酸の濃度を算出してよい。陽性判定部352は、算出した核酸の濃度が基準値以上である場合、検体が陽性であると判定してよい。基準値は、陽性と判定すべき検出対象由来の核酸の濃度に対応付けられた値であってよい。基準値は、実験等により予め設定されていてよい。 The control unit 35 may also create a calibration curve based on optical information obtained from the multiple internal standards 47. For example, the control unit 35 may create a calibration curve based on the intensity of fluorescence emitted by the multiple internal standards 47. In this case, the control unit 35 may use the calibration curve to calculate the concentration of the nucleic acid corresponding to the above-mentioned difference value. The positive determination unit 352 may determine that the sample is positive if the calculated concentration of the nucleic acid is equal to or greater than a reference value. The reference value may be a value associated with the concentration of the nucleic acid derived from the detection target that should be determined to be positive. The reference value may be set in advance by an experiment or the like.

 以降の説明においては、一例として、標識物質および内部標準47が蛍光物質であり、制御部35が標識物質および内部標準47から測定する光学情報として蛍光の強度を測定する場合を例に挙げて説明する。 In the following explanation, as an example, the labeling substance and internal standard 47 are fluorescent substances, and the control unit 35 measures the intensity of fluorescence as the optical information measured from the labeling substance and internal standard 47.

 〔流路基板の第1形態〕
 図5は、流路基板4Aの一例を示す平面図である。流路基板4Aは、流路基板4の一例である。図6は、流路基板4Aが備える流路45に配置される第1領域451および第2領域452の一例を示す模式図である。
[First Form of Flow Channel Substrate]
Fig. 5 is a plan view showing an example of a flow path substrate 4A. The flow path substrate 4A is an example of the flow path substrate 4. Fig. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a first region 451 and a second region 452 arranged in a flow path 45 included in the flow path substrate 4A.

 図5に示すように、流路基板4Aは、液体を受け入れる受液部41と、受液部41に接続する流路45とを備えていてよい。流路45は、プライマーを含む第1試薬101が配置されている第1領域451と、第1領域451と異なる位置に核酸の増幅を行う酵素を含む第2試薬102が配置されている第2領域452とを有していてよい。受液部41と連通する流路45において、第1領域451が位置する空間と第2領域452が位置する空間とは、互いに連通していてよい。 As shown in FIG. 5, the flow path substrate 4A may include a liquid receiving section 41 that receives liquid, and a flow path 45 that connects to the liquid receiving section 41. The flow path 45 may have a first region 451 in which a first reagent 101 containing a primer is disposed, and a second region 452 in which a second reagent 102 containing an enzyme that amplifies nucleic acid is disposed at a position different from the first region 451. In the flow path 45 that communicates with the liquid receiving section 41, the space in which the first region 451 is located and the space in which the second region 452 is located may be in communication with each other.

 本実施形態では、図5に示すように、流路基板4Aは、受液部41と、分岐流路42と、流路45と、貯留部46と、内部標準47とを備えていてよい。流路45は1つあってもよく複数あってもよい。また、内部標準47は1つであってもよく複数あってもよい。本実施形態では、流路45として流路45A~45Dの4つを備え、貯留部46として貯留部46A~46Dの4つを備えるものとして説明するが、これに限られない。また、内部標準47を5つ備えるものとして説明するが、これに限られない。 In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the flow path substrate 4A may include a liquid receiving section 41, a branch flow path 42, a flow path 45, a storage section 46, and an internal standard 47. There may be one or more flow paths 45. Also, there may be one or more internal standards 47. In this embodiment, the flow paths 45 are described as having four flow paths 45A to 45D, and the storage sections 46 are described as having four storage sections 46A to 46D, but this is not limited to this. Also, the flow path substrate 4A is described as having five internal standards 47, but this is not limited to this.

 流路基板4Aは、図4の符号1114に示す状態において、受液部41が流路45および貯留部46よりも上方に位置している。そのため、自重によりボトル部22から流れてきた液体は、受液部41から流路45を介して貯留部46まで流れやすい。 In the flow path substrate 4A, in the state shown by reference numeral 1114 in FIG. 4, the liquid receiving section 41 is located above the flow path 45 and the storage section 46. Therefore, the liquid flowing from the bottle section 22 due to its own weight easily flows from the liquid receiving section 41 through the flow path 45 to the storage section 46.

 受液部41は、ボトル部22から流れてきた液体を受け入れる開口部であってよい。分岐流路42は、受液部41と流路45A~45Dのそれぞれとに接続する流路であってよい。つまり、流路45A~45Dは、受液部41に接続した分岐流路42から分岐していてよい。分岐流路42は、受液部41と流路45A~45Dのそれぞれとに連通していてよい。 The liquid receiving section 41 may be an opening that receives the liquid flowing from the bottle section 22. The branch flow path 42 may be a flow path that connects the liquid receiving section 41 to each of the flow paths 45A to 45D. In other words, the flow paths 45A to 45D may branch off from the branch flow path 42 that is connected to the liquid receiving section 41. The branch flow path 42 may be in communication with the liquid receiving section 41 and each of the flow paths 45A to 45D.

 流路基板4Aは、フィルター部420を有していてよい。フィルター部420は、流路幅が他の部分と比較して狭い部分であってよい。フィルター部420は、流路45に配置される試薬の位置の、貯留部46とは反対側に位置していてよい。すなわち、フィルター部420は、流路45に配置される試薬の位置の上流側に位置していてよい。受液部41から流れ込んだ液体に固形の不純物が含まれている場合に、当該不純物がフィルター部420よりも下流に流れる可能性を低減できる。また、フィルター部420は、流路45A~45Dの分岐位置よりも上流に配置されていてよい。図5に示すように、分岐流路42がフィルター部420を有していてよい。これにより、受液部41から流れ込んだ液体に固形の不純物が含まれている場合に、当該不純物が流路45A~45Dに流れ込む可能性を低減できる。 The flow path substrate 4A may have a filter section 420. The filter section 420 may be a section whose flow path width is narrower than other sections. The filter section 420 may be located on the opposite side of the reservoir section 46 from the position of the reagent placed in the flow path 45. In other words, the filter section 420 may be located upstream of the position of the reagent placed in the flow path 45. When solid impurities are contained in the liquid flowing from the liquid receiving section 41, the possibility of the impurities flowing downstream of the filter section 420 can be reduced. In addition, the filter section 420 may be located upstream of the branching position of the flow paths 45A to 45D. As shown in FIG. 5, the branch flow path 42 may have a filter section 420. This reduces the possibility of the impurities flowing into the flow paths 45A to 45D when solid impurities are contained in the liquid flowing from the liquid receiving section 41.

 但し、流路基板4Aは、分岐流路42を備えていなくてもよい。この場合、流路45A~45Dは、受液部41から分岐していてもよい。流路45が1つである場合、流路45は受液部41に接続していてもよい。また、フィルター部は、流路45A~45Dのそれぞれにおいて、流路45に配置される試薬の位置の、貯留部46とは反対側に位置していてもよい。流路45A~45Dのそれぞれにおいて、第1試薬101が配置されている位置または第1試薬101が配置され得る位置の上流側に、フィルター部を有していてもよい。 However, the flow path substrate 4A may not have a branch flow path 42. In this case, the flow paths 45A to 45D may branch off from the liquid receiving section 41. When there is only one flow path 45, the flow path 45 may be connected to the liquid receiving section 41. Also, the filter section may be located on the opposite side of the reservoir section 46 from the position of the reagent placed in the flow path 45 in each of the flow paths 45A to 45D. Each of the flow paths 45A to 45D may have a filter section upstream of the position where the first reagent 101 is placed or the position where the first reagent 101 can be placed.

 図5に示すように、流路45A~45Dの全ては、1つの受液部41、または、1つの受液部41に接続した分岐流路42から分岐していてよい。但し、流路基板4Aは、受液部41を複数備えていてもよい。この場合、各受液部41に各流路45が接続していてもよいし、各受液部41に1または複数の流路45が接続していてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 5, all of the flow paths 45A-45D may branch off from one liquid receiving section 41 or from a branch flow path 42 connected to one liquid receiving section 41. However, the flow path substrate 4A may have multiple liquid receiving sections 41. In this case, each flow path 45 may be connected to each liquid receiving section 41, or one or multiple flow paths 45 may be connected to each liquid receiving section 41.

 流路45A~45Dは、液体を流す流路であってよい。流路45A~45Dの少なくとも1つには、検体と、前記検体に含まれる検出対象と反応する標識物質と、を含む混合流体を流してもよい。流路45A~45Dのそれぞれは、受液部41から流れ込む液体を受け入れ、流路45A~45Dのそれぞれに接続する貯留部46A~46Dへと流す流路であってよい。流路45A~45Dのそれぞれは、受液部41から貯留部46A~46Dに至るまで連通していてよい。 The flow paths 45A to 45D may be flow paths for flowing liquid. At least one of the flow paths 45A to 45D may be used to flow a mixed fluid containing a specimen and a labeling substance that reacts with the target substance contained in the specimen. Each of the flow paths 45A to 45D may be a flow path that receives liquid flowing from the liquid receiving section 41 and flows it to the storage sections 46A to 46D that are connected to each of the flow paths 45A to 45D. Each of the flow paths 45A to 45D may be connected from the liquid receiving section 41 to the storage sections 46A to 46D.

 流路45A~45Dのうちの少なくとも1つの流路45において、試薬は、流路45A~45Dの分岐位置に対して、受液部41の反対側に配置されていてよい。これにより、受液部41において受け入れた液体に検出対象由来の核酸が含まれている場合、流路45において検出対象由来の核酸を増幅させることができる。 In at least one of the flow paths 45A to 45D, the reagent may be disposed on the opposite side of the liquid receiving section 41 with respect to the branching position of the flow paths 45A to 45D. In this way, if the liquid received in the liquid receiving section 41 contains nucleic acid derived from the detection target, the nucleic acid derived from the detection target can be amplified in the flow path 45.

 本実施形態では、流路45A~45Dのうちの1つの流路45は、第1試薬101が配置されている第1領域451と、第1領域451と異なる位置に第2試薬102が配置されている第2領域452とを有していてよい。 In this embodiment, one of the flow paths 45A to 45D may have a first region 451 in which the first reagent 101 is disposed, and a second region 452 in which the second reagent 102 is disposed at a position different from the first region 451.

 受液部41において受け入れた液体は、流路45A~45Dのそれぞれを流れて、貯留部46A~45Dに貯留する。本実施形態では、図5に示すように、流路45Bが、第1領域451と第2領域452とを有している。そのため、流路45Bを流れる液体は、第1試薬101および第2試薬102に接触する。検体に検出対象が含まれている場合には、第1試薬101および第2試薬102により検出対象由来の核酸を増幅させることができる。 The liquid received in the liquid receiving section 41 flows through each of the flow paths 45A-45D and is stored in the storage sections 46A-45D. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the flow path 45B has a first region 451 and a second region 452. Therefore, the liquid flowing through the flow path 45B comes into contact with the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102. If the sample contains the detection target, the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 can amplify the nucleic acid derived from the detection target.

 従って、ピペット等の特殊器具を用いることなく、流路45に液体を流すという簡単な操作により、検出対象由来の核酸を増幅させることができる。 Therefore, the nucleic acid derived from the detection target can be amplified by the simple operation of flowing liquid through the flow channel 45 without using a special tool such as a pipette.

 第1試薬101は、例えば、検出対象由来の核酸分子の配列に相補的な配列を有するプライマーを含んでいればよい。プライマーは、標的の核酸分子を増幅可能なものが必要に応じて加えられればよく、例えば1種類であってもよいし、3種類以上であってもよい。プライマーは、例えば、第1プライマー、および、第2プライマーであってよい。例えば、第1プライマーは、検出対象の核酸分子のセンス方向に増幅するフォワードプライマーであり、第2プライマーは、核酸分子のアンチセンス方向に増幅するリバースプライマーであってよい。 The first reagent 101 may contain, for example, a primer having a sequence complementary to the sequence of a nucleic acid molecule derived from the detection target. The primer may be added as necessary as long as it is capable of amplifying the target nucleic acid molecule, and may be, for example, one type or three or more types. The primer may be, for example, a first primer and a second primer. For example, the first primer may be a forward primer that amplifies the nucleic acid molecule to be detected in the sense direction, and the second primer may be a reverse primer that amplifies the nucleic acid molecule in the antisense direction.

 その他、第1試薬101には、例えば、dNTPs(デオキシヌクレオシド三リン酸)、NTPs(ヌクレオシド三リン酸)、トレハロース、および、RNA分解酵素阻害剤が含まれていてよい。但し、RNA分解酵素阻害剤がボトル部22に収容されている場合には、RNA分解酵素阻害剤は、第1試薬101に含まれていなくてよい。 The first reagent 101 may further contain, for example, deoxynucleoside triphosphates (dNTPs), nucleoside triphosphates (NTPs), trehalose, and an RNase inhibitor. However, if an RNase inhibitor is contained in the bottle portion 22, the RNase inhibitor does not need to be contained in the first reagent 101.

 図6に示すように、第1試薬101は、複数の第1付着物として、第1領域451に配置されていてよい。第1領域451には、上述した試薬を含む溶液の乾燥物が、第1試薬101の付着物として配置されていてよい。これにより、流路45に流れ込んだ液体が第1付着物に接触したときに、第1試薬101を液体に溶解させることができる。また、第1試薬101を複数の付着物として独立して流路45に配置した場合、第1付着物の表面積を増やすことができる。そのため、第1試薬101の液体への溶解性を高めることができる。第1試薬101は、複数の皮膜として、第1領域451に配置されていてよい。第1付着物は複数であればよく、例えば5以上であってもよく、10以上であってもよい。 6, the first reagent 101 may be disposed in the first region 451 as a plurality of first attachments. In the first region 451, a dried product of a solution containing the above-mentioned reagent may be disposed as an attachment of the first reagent 101. This allows the first reagent 101 to dissolve in the liquid when the liquid that has flowed into the flow path 45 comes into contact with the first attachment. Furthermore, when the first reagent 101 is disposed in the flow path 45 independently as a plurality of attachments, the surface area of the first attachment can be increased. Therefore, the solubility of the first reagent 101 in the liquid can be increased. The first reagent 101 may be disposed in the first region 451 as a plurality of films. The number of first attachments may be more than one, and may be, for example, 5 or more, or 10 or more.

 図6に示すように、複数の第1付着物は、一方向に並んで配置されていてよい。一方向は、流路45に沿った方向であってよい。これにより、液体の流れに沿って順次、第1試薬101を液体に溶解させることができる。複数の第1付着物は流路45に沿って、一方向に並んで配置されていてもよい。本実施形態では、第1試薬101は、複数の第1付着物として、1列に並んで配置されているが、2列以上に並んで配置されてもよい。また、複数の第1付着物は、流路45の内壁455に接触しないように、流路45の底部454に配置されていてよい。これにより、第1試薬101を液体にさらに溶解させやすくすることができる。 As shown in FIG. 6, the multiple first attachments may be arranged in one direction. The one direction may be along the flow path 45. This allows the first reagent 101 to be dissolved in the liquid sequentially along the flow of the liquid. The multiple first attachments may be arranged in one direction along the flow path 45. In this embodiment, the first reagent 101 is arranged in one row as the multiple first attachments, but they may be arranged in two or more rows. In addition, the multiple first attachments may be arranged on the bottom 454 of the flow path 45 so as not to come into contact with the inner wall 455 of the flow path 45. This makes it easier to dissolve the first reagent 101 in the liquid.

 第1付着物は、図6に示すように、平面視したときに、ドット形状を有していてよい。その他、第1付着物は、平面視したときに、線形状、楕円形状、または、四角、六角形および星型等の多角形状であってもよい。 The first attachment may have a dot shape when viewed in a plane, as shown in FIG. 6. In addition, the first attachment may have a linear shape, an elliptical shape, or a polygonal shape such as a square, hexagon, or star shape when viewed in a plane.

 図21は、第1付着物の表面粗さおよび第2付着物(第2試薬102)の表面粗さを示す図である。図21において符号2101で示す図は、第1付着物(第1試薬101)の拡大写真であり、符号2102で示すグラフは、第1付着物が付着した箇所および付着していない箇所における流路45の表面の高さを示す。表面の高さが0.000μmである箇所が流路45の表面であり、表面の高さが0.000μmより大きい値を示す箇所が、第1付着物が付着した箇所の表面である。 FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the surface roughness of the first attachment and the surface roughness of the second attachment (second reagent 102). The diagram indicated by reference numeral 2101 in FIG. 21 is an enlarged photograph of the first attachment (first reagent 101), and the graph indicated by reference numeral 2102 shows the surface height of the flow channel 45 at locations where the first attachment is attached and at locations where it is not attached. Locations where the surface height is 0.000 μm are the surface of the flow channel 45, and locations where the surface height is greater than 0.000 μm are the surfaces where the first attachment is attached.

 図21に示すように、第1付着物の表面粗さは、流路45の表面粗さと比較して、大きくてよい。これにより、第1付着物付近を流れる液体の流れを乱すことができ、第1試薬101の溶解を促進することができる。表面粗さの指標としては、例えば算術平均粗さSa(ISO 25178)が挙げられる。第1付着物の表面粗さ(Sa)は、例えば、0.6~3μmに設定されてもよいし、1~3μmに設定されてもよい。符号2102のグラフに例示されている第1付着物の表面粗さは1.55μmであった。また、流路の表面粗さ(Sa)は、例えば、0.5μm未満に設定されていてよく、0.3μm未満に設定されていてもよい。符号2102のグラフに例示されている流路45の表面粗さは0.19μmであった。 As shown in FIG. 21, the surface roughness of the first attachment may be greater than the surface roughness of the flow path 45. This can disrupt the flow of the liquid flowing near the first attachment, and promote dissolution of the first reagent 101. An example of the surface roughness is the arithmetic mean roughness Sa (ISO 25178). The surface roughness (Sa) of the first attachment may be set to, for example, 0.6 to 3 μm, or 1 to 3 μm. The surface roughness of the first attachment illustrated in the graph with reference numeral 2102 was 1.55 μm. The surface roughness (Sa) of the flow path may be set to, for example, less than 0.5 μm, or less than 0.3 μm. The surface roughness of the flow path 45 illustrated in the graph with reference numeral 2102 was 0.19 μm.

 第1付着物の表面粗さSaは、第1付着物全体の測定結果から求めることができる。すなわち、複数の第1付着物の表面粗さ全体の測定結果から求めることができる。また、任意の第1付着物の任意の部位の測定結果から求めてもよい。任意の第1付着物の任意の部位の測定結果を複数取得した場合、測定結果の算術平均によって、第1付着物の表面粗さを求めてもよい。 The surface roughness Sa of the first attachment can be determined from the measurement results of the entire first attachment. That is, it can be determined from the measurement results of the entire surface roughness of multiple first attachments. It may also be determined from the measurement results of any part of any first attachment. When multiple measurement results of any part of any first attachment are obtained, the surface roughness of the first attachment may be determined by the arithmetic average of the measurement results.

 また、流路45の表面粗さSaは流路45全体の測定結果から求めることができる。このとき、流路45の表面粗さSaは、流路45の底部全体の測定結果から求めてよい。また、流路45の任意の部位の測定結果から求めてもよい。流路45の任意の部位の測定結果を複数取得した場合、測定結果の算術平均によって、流路45の表面粗さを求めてもよい。 The surface roughness Sa of the flow path 45 can be obtained from the measurement results of the entire flow path 45. In this case, the surface roughness Sa of the flow path 45 may be obtained from the measurement results of the entire bottom of the flow path 45. It may also be obtained from the measurement results of any part of the flow path 45. When multiple measurement results of any part of the flow path 45 are obtained, the surface roughness of the flow path 45 may be obtained by the arithmetic average of the measurement results.

 また、第1付着物には、表面粗さが、局所的に流路45の表面粗さよりも小さい箇所があってもよく、流路45には、表面粗さが、局所的に第1付着物の表面粗さよりも大きい箇所があってもよい。 Furthermore, the first attachment may have a portion where the surface roughness is locally smaller than the surface roughness of the flow path 45, and the flow path 45 may have a portion where the surface roughness is locally larger than the surface roughness of the first attachment.

 第2試薬102は、例えば、AMV-RT(Avian Myeloblastosis Virus)、RNase H(Ribonuclease H)、および、T7 RNA polymeraseといった酵素であってよい。その他、第2試薬102には、例えば、トレハロースおよび界面活性剤が含まれていてよい。 The second reagent 102 may be, for example, an enzyme such as AMV-RT (Avian Myeloblastosis Virus), RNase H (Ribonuclease H), and T7 RNA polymerase. In addition, the second reagent 102 may contain, for example, trehalose and a surfactant.

 図6に示すように、第2試薬102は、複数の第2付着物として、第2領域452に配置されていてよい。第2領域452には、上述した試薬を含む溶液の乾燥物が、第2試薬102の付着物として配置されていてよい。これにより、流路45に流れ込んだ液体が第2付着物に接触したときに、第2試薬102を液体に溶解させることができる。第2試薬102を複数の付着物として独立して流路45に配置した場合、第2付着物の表面積を増やすことができる。そのため、第2試薬102の液体への溶解性を高めることができる。第2試薬102は、複数の皮膜として、第2領域452に配置されていてよい。第2付着物は複数であればよく、例えば5以上であってもよく、10以上であってもよい。 As shown in FIG. 6, the second reagent 102 may be disposed in the second region 452 as a plurality of second attachments. In the second region 452, a dried product of a solution containing the above-mentioned reagent may be disposed as an attachment of the second reagent 102. This allows the second reagent 102 to dissolve in the liquid when the liquid that has flowed into the flow path 45 comes into contact with the second attachment. When the second reagent 102 is disposed in the flow path 45 independently as a plurality of attachments, the surface area of the second attachment can be increased. Therefore, the solubility of the second reagent 102 in the liquid can be increased. The second reagent 102 may be disposed in the second region 452 as a plurality of films. The number of second attachments may be more than one, and may be, for example, 5 or more, or 10 or more.

 図6に示すように、複数の第2付着物は、一方向に並んで配置されていてよい。これにより、液体の流れに沿って順次、第2試薬102を液体に溶解させることができる。複数の第2付着物は流路45に沿って、一方向に並んで配置されていてもよい。本実施形態では、第2試薬102は、複数の第2付着物として、1列に並んで配置されているが、2列以上に並んで配置されてもよい。また、複数の第2付着物は、流路45の内壁455に接触しないように、流路45の底部454に配置されていてよい。これにより、第2試薬102を液体にさらに溶解させやすくすることができる。 As shown in FIG. 6, the multiple second attachments may be arranged in one direction. This allows the second reagent 102 to be dissolved in the liquid sequentially along the flow of the liquid. The multiple second attachments may be arranged in one direction along the flow path 45. In this embodiment, the second reagent 102 is arranged in one row as the multiple second attachments, but they may be arranged in two or more rows. In addition, the multiple second attachments may be arranged on the bottom 454 of the flow path 45 so as not to come into contact with the inner wall 455 of the flow path 45. This makes it even easier to dissolve the second reagent 102 in the liquid.

 第2付着物は、図6に示すように、平面視したときに、ドット形状を有していてよい。その他、第2付着物は、平面視したときに、線形状、楕円形状、または、四角形、六角形および星型等の多角形状であってもよい。 The second attachment may have a dot shape when viewed in a plane, as shown in FIG. 6. In addition, the second attachment may have a linear shape, an elliptical shape, or a polygonal shape such as a square, hexagon, or star shape when viewed in a plane.

 図21において符号2103で示す図は、第2付着物の拡大写真であり、符号2104で示すグラフは、第2付着物が付着した箇所および付着していない箇所における流路45の表面の高さを示す。表面の高さが0.000μmの箇所が流路45の表面であり、表面の高さが0.000μmより大きい値を示す箇所が、第2付着物が付着した箇所の表面である。 In FIG. 21, the figure indicated by the reference numeral 2103 is an enlarged photograph of the second adhesion, and the graph indicated by the reference numeral 2104 shows the surface height of the flow path 45 at the locations where the second adhesion is adhered and at the locations where the second adhesion is not adhered. The locations where the surface height is 0.000 μm are the surfaces of the flow path 45, and the locations where the surface height is greater than 0.000 μm are the surfaces where the second adhesion is adhered.

 第1付着物の表面粗さと、第2付着物の表面粗さと、は異なっていてよい。これにより、第1付着物と第2付着物との溶解速度を異ならせることが出来る。例えば、符号2102および符号2104で示すグラフのとおり、第1付着物の表面粗さは、第2付着物の表面粗さと比較して、大きくてよい。これにより、第1付着物付近を流れる液体の流れを乱すことができ、第1試薬101の溶解を促進することができる。表面粗さの指標としては、例えば算術平均粗さSa(ISO 25178)が挙げられる。第2付着物の表面粗さ(Sa)は、例えば、0.1~0.5μmに設定されてもよいし、0.2~0.4μmに設定されてもよい。符号2104のグラフに例示されている第2付着物の表面粗さは0.27μmであった。 The surface roughness of the first attachment and the surface roughness of the second attachment may be different. This allows the dissolution speeds of the first attachment and the second attachment to differ. For example, as shown in the graphs indicated by reference numerals 2102 and 2104, the surface roughness of the first attachment may be greater than the surface roughness of the second attachment. This allows the flow of liquid flowing near the first attachment to be disturbed, and the dissolution of the first reagent 101 to be promoted. An example of an index of surface roughness is the arithmetic mean roughness Sa (ISO 25178). The surface roughness (Sa) of the second attachment may be set to, for example, 0.1 to 0.5 μm, or 0.2 to 0.4 μm. The surface roughness of the second attachment illustrated in the graph indicated by reference numeral 2104 was 0.27 μm.

 第2付着物の表面粗さSaは第2付着物全体の測定結果から求めることができる。すなわち、複数の第2付着物の表面粗さ全体の測定結果から求めることができる。また、任意の第2付着物の任意の部位の測定結果から求めてもよい。任意の第2付着物の任意の部位の測定結果を複数取得した場合、測定結果の算術平均によって、第2付着物の表面粗さを求めてもよい。 The surface roughness Sa of the second attachment can be determined from the measurement results of the entire second attachment. That is, it can be determined from the measurement results of the entire surface roughness of multiple second attachments. It may also be determined from the measurement results of any part of any second attachment. When multiple measurement results of any part of any second attachment are obtained, the surface roughness of the second attachment may be determined by the arithmetic average of the measurement results.

 また、第2付着物には、表面粗さが、局所的に第1付着物の表面粗さよりも大きい箇所があってもよく、第1付着物には、表面粗さが、局所的に第2付着物の表面粗さよりも小さい箇所があってもよい。 Furthermore, the second attachment may have a portion where the surface roughness is locally greater than the surface roughness of the first attachment, and the first attachment may have a portion where the surface roughness is locally less than the surface roughness of the second attachment.

 また、第2付着物の表面粗さは、流路45の表面粗さと比較して、大きくてよい。このとき、また、第2付着物には、表面粗さが、局所的に流路45の表面粗さよりも小さい箇所があってもよく、流路45には、表面粗さが、局所的に第2付着物の表面粗さよりも大きい箇所があってもよい。 The surface roughness of the second attachment may be greater than the surface roughness of the flow path 45. In this case, the second attachment may have a portion where the surface roughness is locally smaller than the surface roughness of the flow path 45, and the flow path 45 may have a portion where the surface roughness is locally greater than the surface roughness of the second attachment.

 図5に示すように、第2領域452は、第1領域451が配置された位置に対して、受液部41と反対側に配置されていてよい。すなわち、第2領域452は、第1領域451の下流に配置されていてよい。そのため、流路45Bを流れる液体を、第1試薬101および第2試薬102の順に接触させることができる。 As shown in FIG. 5, the second region 452 may be disposed on the opposite side of the liquid receiving section 41 with respect to the position where the first region 451 is disposed. In other words, the second region 452 may be disposed downstream of the first region 451. Therefore, the liquid flowing through the flow path 45B can be brought into contact with the first reagent 101 and then the second reagent 102.

 図5に示すように、第2領域452は、第1領域451と比較して貯留部46の近くに配置されていてもよい。言い換えると、流路45に沿って、第1領域451、第2領域452、貯留部46の順に並ぶように配置されていてもよい。そのため、流路45Bを流れる液体を第1試薬101および第2試薬102の順に接触させた後、貯留部46に貯留することができる。 As shown in FIG. 5, the second region 452 may be disposed closer to the storage section 46 than the first region 451. In other words, the first region 451, the second region 452, and the storage section 46 may be disposed in this order along the flow path 45. Therefore, the liquid flowing through the flow path 45B can be brought into contact with the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 in this order, and then stored in the storage section 46.

 検体に検出対象が含まれている場合、検出対象由来の核酸が含まれる液体をまず第1試薬101と接触させることができる。そのため、検出対象由来の核酸を第1プライマーおよび第2プライマーとアニーリングさせることができる。その後、流路45Bを流れる液体が第2試薬102に含まれる酵素と接触することにより、検出対象由来の核酸を増幅させることができる。 If the sample contains the target of detection, the liquid containing the nucleic acid derived from the target of detection can first be brought into contact with the first reagent 101. This allows the nucleic acid derived from the target of detection to be annealed with the first primer and the second primer. After that, the liquid flowing through the flow path 45B comes into contact with the enzyme contained in the second reagent 102, thereby amplifying the nucleic acid derived from the target of detection.

 第1領域451には、第1試薬101として、第1プライマーおよび第2プライマーが配置されていればよい。従って、例えば、dNTPおよびNTPは、第2試薬102として、第2領域452に配置されてもよい。このような配置であっても、流路45を流れる液体に含まれる検出対象由来の核酸を増幅させることができる。 The first region 451 may contain a first primer and a second primer as the first reagent 101. Therefore, for example, dNTP and NTP may be placed in the second region 452 as the second reagent 102. Even with this arrangement, it is possible to amplify the nucleic acid derived from the detection target contained in the liquid flowing through the flow path 45.

 また、図6に示すように、第2付着物は、第1付着物よりも大きくてよい。例えば、第1試薬101の溶液および第2試薬102の溶液を流路45に塗布することにより、第1付着物および第2付着物が流路45に配置されてよい。第2試薬102には界面活性剤が含まれていてよい。そのため、第2試薬102の溶液は、第1試薬101の溶液に比べ、流路45の底面に広がりやすい。 Also, as shown in FIG. 6, the second attachment may be larger than the first attachment. For example, the first attachment and the second attachment may be disposed in the flow path 45 by applying a solution of the first reagent 101 and a solution of the second reagent 102 to the flow path 45. The second reagent 102 may contain a surfactant. Therefore, the solution of the second reagent 102 spreads more easily on the bottom surface of the flow path 45 than the solution of the first reagent 101.

 複数の第1付着物全体の面積は、第1試薬101を含む溶液の量により決めることができる。複数の第2付着物全体の面積は、第2試薬102を含む溶液の量により決めることができる。例えば、複数の第1付着物全体の面積は、複数の第2付着物全体の面積の約2倍であってよい。 The total area of the multiple first attachments can be determined by the amount of solution containing the first reagent 101. The total area of the multiple second attachments can be determined by the amount of solution containing the second reagent 102. For example, the total area of the multiple first attachments can be approximately twice the total area of the multiple second attachments.

 流路45の幅は、例えば220μmであってよい。この場合、第1付着物がドット形状である場合、その直径は、流路45の幅と比較して小さければよい。第1付着物の直径は、例えば50~100μmであってよい。第1付着物同士の間隔は、100~200μmであってよい。第2付着物がドット形状である場合、その直径は、流路45の幅と比較して小さければよい。第2付着物の直径は、例えば80~200μmであってよい。第2付着物同士のドット間隔は、200~250μmであってよい。また、図21において符号2102のグラフおよび符号2104のグラフに示す通り、第1付着物より第2付着物の直径が大きくてよい。符号2102のグラフおよび符号2104のグラフに示す高さは、それぞれ第1付着物および第2付着物の高さを表していると見なすことができる。符号2102のグラフに例示されている第1付着物の直径は14.193μmであるのに対し、符号2104のグラフに例示されている第2付着物の直径は19.816μmであった。また、第1付着物より第2付着物の高さが高くてよい。 The width of the flow path 45 may be, for example, 220 μm. In this case, if the first attachment is dot-shaped, its diameter may be smaller than the width of the flow path 45. The diameter of the first attachment may be, for example, 50 to 100 μm. The interval between the first attachments may be 100 to 200 μm. If the second attachment is dot-shaped, its diameter may be smaller than the width of the flow path 45. The diameter of the second attachment may be, for example, 80 to 200 μm. The dot interval between the second attachments may be 200 to 250 μm. Also, as shown in the graphs 2102 and 2104 in FIG. 21, the diameter of the second attachment may be larger than the first attachment. The heights shown in the graphs 2102 and 2104 can be considered to represent the heights of the first attachment and the second attachment, respectively. The diameter of the first deposit illustrated in the graph with reference numeral 2102 is 14.193 μm, whereas the diameter of the second deposit illustrated in the graph with reference numeral 2104 is 19.816 μm. In addition, the height of the second deposit may be greater than that of the first deposit.

 例えば、ボトル部22に収容されている検体を含む液体の量が約50nLである場合、当該液体に含まれる核酸を増幅させるために必要な第1試薬101の溶液が約48nL、第2試薬102の溶液が約24nLであるものとする。この場合、1つの付着物あたりの塗布量が約0.7nLであるとすると、第1付着物の数は69個、第2付着物の数は34個となる。これらの液体および溶液の量は、PCR(Polymerase Chain Reaction)チューブを用いる場合よりも少量である。つまり、流路基板4Aを用いることにより、検体を含む液体も、流路45に塗布する第1試薬101および第2試薬102の塗布量(印刷量)も少なくできる。 For example, if the amount of liquid containing a specimen contained in the bottle portion 22 is approximately 50 nL, approximately 48 nL of the first reagent 101 solution and approximately 24 nL of the second reagent 102 solution are required to amplify the nucleic acid contained in the liquid. In this case, if the application amount per attachment is approximately 0.7 nL, the number of first attachments will be 69 and the number of second attachments will be 34. The amounts of these liquids and solutions are less than when a PCR (Polymerase Chain Reaction) tube is used. In other words, by using the flow path substrate 4A, the amount of liquid containing the specimen and the application (printing amount) of the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 applied to the flow path 45 can be reduced.

 第1試薬101および第2試薬102の量は、検出対象によって変わってよい。そのため、検出対象に応じて、第1試薬101の溶液の量、第1付着物の数、第2試薬102の溶液の量、および、第2付着物の数が変更されてよい。また、流路45の延伸方向の長さ、および、流路45の幅によって、第1付着物の大きさ、第2付着物の大きさ、第1付着物同士の間隔、第2付着物同士の間隔が調整されてよい。 The amounts of the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 may vary depending on the detection target. Therefore, the amount of solution of the first reagent 101, the number of first attachments, the amount of solution of the second reagent 102, and the number of second attachments may be changed depending on the detection target. In addition, the size of the first attachments, the size of the second attachments, the spacing between the first attachments, and the spacing between the second attachments may be adjusted depending on the length of the flow path 45 in the extension direction and the width of the flow path 45.

 上述したように、受液部41から流れ込んだ液体に含まれる核酸は、まず第1領域451に配置された第1試薬101と反応した後、第2領域452に配置された第2試薬102と反応してよい。液体に含まれる核酸を第2試薬102により増幅させるために、第1試薬101が液体に含まれる核酸とアニーリングするためである。また、上述したように、一旦高温までカートリッジ2を昇温した後に、核酸の増幅が促進される温度まで降温する場合、第1試薬101と反応した核酸を第2試薬102と反応させる前に降温してもよい。第1領域451と第2領域452との間の距離は、これらの点を考慮して決められていてよい。また、加熱部31がボトル部22を80℃~95℃の温度で加熱し、本体部21を37℃~41℃の温度で加熱する場合を考える。この場合、ボトル部22から受液部41を介して流れ込んだ液体の温度が十分低下した後に液体が第2領域452に接触するよう、第2領域452は配置されていてもよい。 As described above, the nucleic acid contained in the liquid flowing in from the liquid receiving section 41 may first react with the first reagent 101 arranged in the first region 451, and then react with the second reagent 102 arranged in the second region 452. This is because the first reagent 101 anneals to the nucleic acid contained in the liquid in order to amplify the nucleic acid contained in the liquid with the second reagent 102. Also, as described above, when the cartridge 2 is once heated to a high temperature and then cooled to a temperature that promotes the amplification of the nucleic acid, the nucleic acid that reacted with the first reagent 101 may be cooled before reacting with the second reagent 102. The distance between the first region 451 and the second region 452 may be determined taking these points into consideration. Also, consider a case where the heating section 31 heats the bottle section 22 to a temperature of 80°C to 95°C and heats the main body section 21 to a temperature of 37°C to 41°C. In this case, the second region 452 may be positioned so that the liquid that flows from the bottle portion 22 through the liquid receiving portion 41 comes into contact with the second region 452 after the temperature of the liquid has sufficiently decreased.

 第1領域451および第2領域452は、流路45の直線箇所に配置されていてよい。この場合、第1試薬101および第2試薬102を流路45に容易に配置できる。図6に示す第1領域451のように、流路45における1箇所の直線箇所に試薬を配置できない場合には、2箇所以上の直線箇所に試薬が配置されてよい。 The first region 451 and the second region 452 may be disposed in a linear portion of the flow path 45. In this case, the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 can be easily disposed in the flow path 45. When it is not possible to dispose the reagent in one linear portion of the flow path 45, such as the first region 451 shown in FIG. 6, the reagent may be disposed in two or more linear portions.

 流路45には、さらに、増幅された核酸と特異的に結合する標識物質が配置されていてよい。標識物質が蛍光物質である場合、標識物質に励起光が照射されることにより、標識物質は蛍光を発する。そのため、検出装置3は、貯留部46に向けて励起光を照射することにより、検出対象由来の核酸が発した蛍光の強度を測定できる。 The flow path 45 may further contain a labeling substance that specifically binds to the amplified nucleic acid. If the labeling substance is a fluorescent substance, the labeling substance emits fluorescence when irradiated with excitation light. Therefore, the detection device 3 can measure the intensity of the fluorescence emitted by the nucleic acid derived from the detection target by irradiating the storage section 46 with excitation light.

 標識物質は、第1領域451の下流に配置されていてよい。例えば、標識物質は、第2試薬102として、第2領域452に配置されていてよい。これにより、第2試薬102に含まれる酵素により増幅された核酸に、標識物質を効率良く結合させることができる。標識物質は、モレキュラービーコンであってよい。 The labeling substance may be disposed downstream of the first region 451. For example, the labeling substance may be disposed in the second region 452 as the second reagent 102. This allows the labeling substance to efficiently bind to the nucleic acid amplified by the enzyme contained in the second reagent 102. The labeling substance may be a molecular beacon.

 流路45A~45Dのうちの1つの流路45を流れる液体を、ネガティブコントロールとして機能させてもよい。図5では、流路45Aがネガティブコントロール用の流路として機能する例を示している。 The liquid flowing through one of the flow paths 45A to 45D may function as a negative control. Figure 5 shows an example in which the flow path 45A functions as a negative control flow path.

 流路45Aには、第1領域451は配置されず、少なくとも標識物質が配置されてよい。本実施形態では、図5に示すように、流路45Aは、少なくとも標識物質が配置された第2領域452を有していてよい。これにより、流路45Aを流れる液体に検出対象由来の核酸が含まれている場合であっても、当該核酸を増幅させるためのプライマーと当該核酸を反応させないようにすることができる。そのため、検出装置3は、流路45Aを流れ貯留部46Aに貯留した液体に対して励起光を照射することにより、検出対象由来の核酸以外の物質が発する蛍光の強度を検出できる。従って、検出装置3は、当該蛍光の強度を基準として、流路45Bにおいて第1試薬101および第2試薬102と反応することにより増幅した検出対象由来の核酸が発する蛍光の強度を、精度よく検出できる。 The flow path 45A may not have the first region 451, but may have at least a labeling substance. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the flow path 45A may have at least a second region 452 in which a labeling substance is disposed. This makes it possible to prevent the nucleic acid from reacting with a primer for amplifying the nucleic acid even if the liquid flowing through the flow path 45A contains nucleic acid derived from the detection target. Therefore, the detection device 3 can detect the intensity of fluorescence emitted by a substance other than the nucleic acid derived from the detection target by irradiating the liquid flowing through the flow path 45A and stored in the storage section 46A with excitation light. Therefore, the detection device 3 can accurately detect the intensity of fluorescence emitted by the nucleic acid derived from the detection target that has been amplified by reacting with the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 in the flow path 45B, using the intensity of the fluorescence as a reference.

 このように、流路基板4Aでは、第1試薬101および第2試薬102の両方を配置せず、検出対象由来の核酸の検出を目的としない流路45が分岐流路42に接続されていてよい。流路45Aの他、流路45C,45Dも、検出対象由来の核酸の検出を目的としない流路であってよい。 In this way, in the flow path substrate 4A, both the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 may not be arranged, and a flow path 45 that is not intended to detect nucleic acids derived from the detection target may be connected to the branch flow path 42. In addition to flow path 45A, flow paths 45C and 45D may also be flow paths that are not intended to detect nucleic acids derived from the detection target.

 流路45A~45Dのそれぞれは、流路45の下流側において、屈曲領域453A~453Dを有していてよい。流路45A~45Dのそれぞれは、試薬が配置されている位置、または、試薬が配置され得る位置の下流において、屈曲領域453A~453Dを有していてよい。これにより、試薬が溶解した液体を屈曲領域453に流すことができる。この液体が屈曲領域453を流れることにより、試薬と液体とを混ぜることができる。従って、検出対象由来の核酸を試薬に効率良く反応させることができる。 Each of the flow channels 45A to 45D may have a bending region 453A to 453D downstream of the flow channel 45. Each of the flow channels 45A to 45D may have a bending region 453A to 453D downstream of the position where the reagent is placed or the position where the reagent can be placed. This allows the liquid in which the reagent is dissolved to flow into the bending region 453. As this liquid flows through the bending region 453, the reagent and the liquid can be mixed. Therefore, the nucleic acid derived from the detection target can be reacted with the reagent efficiently.

 第1試薬101および第2試薬102が配置されている流路45に、屈曲領域453が形成されていればよい。本実施形態では、少なくとも流路45Bに、屈曲領域453Bが形成されていればよい。 It is sufficient that a bending region 453 is formed in the flow path 45 in which the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 are placed. In this embodiment, it is sufficient that a bending region 453B is formed at least in the flow path 45B.

 貯留部46は、流路45に接続されていてよい。図5に示すように、貯留部46A~46Dはそれぞれ、流路45A~45Dのそれぞれに接続されていてよい。貯留部46は、流路45から流れてきた液体を貯留してよい。貯留部46は、流路の一部であってよい。 The storage section 46 may be connected to the flow path 45. As shown in FIG. 5, the storage sections 46A to 46D may be connected to the flow paths 45A to 45D, respectively. The storage section 46 may store the liquid that flows from the flow path 45. The storage section 46 may be part of the flow path.

 流路45が第1領域451および第2領域452を有する場合、貯留部46は、第2領域452の下流に位置し、増幅された核酸を含む液体を貯留してよい。本実施形態では、流路45Bが第1領域451および第2領域452を有する。従って、貯留部46Bは、第2領域452Bの下流に位置し、増幅された核酸を含む液体を貯留してよい。 When the flow path 45 has a first region 451 and a second region 452, the storage section 46 may be located downstream of the second region 452 and store a liquid containing the amplified nucleic acid. In this embodiment, the flow path 45B has a first region 451 and a second region 452. Therefore, the storage section 46B may be located downstream of the second region 452B and store a liquid containing the amplified nucleic acid.

 貯留部46において、流路45から流れてきた液体を貯留できる。第1領域451および第2領域452を有する流路45と接続された貯留部46においては、検出対象由来の核酸が液体に含まれている場合には、増幅された核酸を含む液体を貯留できる。従って、検出装置3は、増幅された核酸を安定した状態で撮像できる。 The storage section 46 can store the liquid that flows from the flow path 45. In the storage section 46 connected to the flow path 45 having the first region 451 and the second region 452, if the liquid contains nucleic acid derived from the detection target, the liquid containing the amplified nucleic acid can be stored. Therefore, the detection device 3 can image the amplified nucleic acid in a stable state.

 貯留部46の幅は、流路45の幅よりも大きくてよい。これにより、貯留部46から発せられる蛍光の強度の測定精度を高めることができる。貯留部46の容積は、受液部41が受け入れる液体の量に相当する容積であってよい。貯留部46の容積は、例えば約50nLであってよい。このように、貯留部46の容積が比較的小さくなるように、貯留部46が流路基板4Aに形成されてよい。 The width of the storage section 46 may be greater than the width of the flow path 45. This can improve the measurement accuracy of the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the storage section 46. The volume of the storage section 46 may be a volume equivalent to the amount of liquid received by the liquid receiving section 41. The volume of the storage section 46 may be, for example, approximately 50 nL. In this manner, the storage section 46 may be formed on the flow path substrate 4A so that the volume of the storage section 46 is relatively small.

 図5に示すように、貯留部46A~46Dのうちの隣接する2つの貯留部46の間の第1距離D1は、当該2つの貯留部46のそれぞれに接続する2つの流路45の間の第2距離D2よりも大きくてよい。これにより、隣接する2つの貯留部46の配置間隔を比較的広くできる。従って、検出装置3は、画像解析により、各貯留部46から発せられる蛍光の強度を容易に取得できる。 As shown in FIG. 5, the first distance D1 between two adjacent storage sections 46 among the storage sections 46A-46D may be greater than the second distance D2 between the two flow paths 45 connected to each of the two storage sections 46. This allows the spacing between the two adjacent storage sections 46 to be relatively wide. Therefore, the detection device 3 can easily obtain the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from each storage section 46 through image analysis.

 貯留部46には、試薬が配置されていてもよい。貯留部46は、検出対象由来の核酸の増幅に用いられる試薬が配置されていてもよい。例えば、貯留部46には、第1試薬101または第2試薬102のいずれか一方が配置されていてもよい。また、例えば、貯留部46には、第1試薬101および/または第2試薬102の一部が配置されていてもよい。 A reagent may be placed in the storage section 46. A reagent used for amplifying nucleic acid derived from the detection target may be placed in the storage section 46. For example, either the first reagent 101 or the second reagent 102 may be placed in the storage section 46. Also, for example, a portion of the first reagent 101 and/or the second reagent 102 may be placed in the storage section 46.

 貯留部46に、第1試薬101または第2試薬102のいずれか一方が配置される場合、貯留部46と比較して上流に位置する流路45に、貯留部46に配置された試薬とは異なる第1試薬101または第2試薬102が配置されていてもよい。例えば、貯留部46に第2試薬102が配置される場合、貯留部46と比較して上流に位置する流路45に第1試薬101が配置されていてもよい。すなわち、貯留部46と比較して上流に位置する流路45に第1領域451が位置し、貯留部46に第2領域452が位置してもよい。これによって、流路45Bを流れる液体を、第1試薬101および第2試薬102の順に接触させることができる。 When either the first reagent 101 or the second reagent 102 is placed in the storage section 46, the first reagent 101 or the second reagent 102 different from the reagent placed in the storage section 46 may be placed in the flow path 45 located upstream compared to the storage section 46. For example, when the second reagent 102 is placed in the storage section 46, the first reagent 101 may be placed in the flow path 45 located upstream compared to the storage section 46. That is, the first region 451 may be located in the flow path 45 located upstream compared to the storage section 46, and the second region 452 may be located in the storage section 46. This allows the liquid flowing through the flow path 45B to come into contact with the first reagent 101 and then the second reagent 102 in that order.

 (その他の構成)
 その他、流路基板4Aは、貯留部46A~46Dの下流に、貯留部46A~46Dのそれぞれと接続する第2貯留部48を有していてもよい。言い換えれば、第2貯留部48は、受液部41からの距離が貯留部46よりも遠い位置に配置されていてもよい。この場合、貯留部46の容量以上の液体が貯留部46に流れ込んだ場合に、貯留部46から漏れ出た液体を第2貯留部48に貯留できる。そのため、貯留部46から流路45に液体が逆流する可能性を低減できる。
(Other configurations)
In addition, the flow path substrate 4A may have a second storage portion 48 downstream of the storage portions 46A to 46D, which is connected to each of the storage portions 46A to 46D. In other words, the second storage portion 48 may be disposed at a position farther away from the liquid receiving portion 41 than the storage portion 46. In this case, when liquid flows into the storage portion 46 in an amount equal to or greater than the capacity of the storage portion 46, the liquid leaking out of the storage portion 46 can be stored in the second storage portion 48. This reduces the possibility of liquid flowing back from the storage portion 46 into the flow path 45.

 また、第2貯留部48は、ポジティブコントロールとして機能する物質を配置してもよい。例えば、ポジティブコントロールとして用いる流路基板4Aの第2貯留部48にのみ、ポジティブコントロールとして機能する物質が配置されてもよい。当該物質は、貯留部46と光学的に比較するものであればよく、当該物質として、例えば、色素、発光物質または蛍光物質が配置されていてもよいがこれに限られない。また、検出システム1が正常に機能するか検証するために、判定対象の検体の光学情報を測定する前に、意図的に検出対象を含ませた検体を、受液部41を介して流路45に流し、第2貯留部48において検出対象由来の核酸に応じた光学情報を測定してもよい。図2の符号1102に示されるように、第2貯留部48は、本体部21の窓部211を介して視認できる。 Also, the second storage section 48 may be provided with a substance that functions as a positive control. For example, a substance that functions as a positive control may be provided only in the second storage section 48 of the flow path substrate 4A used as a positive control. The substance may be optically compared with the storage section 46, and may be, for example, a dye, a luminescent substance, or a fluorescent substance, but is not limited to this. In addition, in order to verify whether the detection system 1 functions normally, a sample that intentionally contains the detection target may be flowed through the flow path 45 via the liquid receiving section 41 before measuring the optical information of the sample to be determined, and the optical information corresponding to the nucleic acid derived from the detection target may be measured in the second storage section 48. As shown by the reference numeral 1102 in FIG. 2, the second storage section 48 can be viewed through the window section 211 of the main body section 21.

 また、流路基板4Aは、分岐した流路45の少なくとも1つにおいて、受液部41からの距離が貯留部46よりも遠い位置に流路45を流れる液体の通過を検知する検知物質が位置していてもよい。流路45は、分岐流路42で分岐した後、貯留部46を介して第2貯留部48に連通する空間であってよい。例えば、受液部41からの距離が貯留部46よりも遠い位置とは、受液部41が受け入れた液体が流路45を流れて、貯留部46を通過した後に到達する位置である。また、当該検知物質を、流路45を流れる液体に溶解性を有する蛍光物質としてもよい。このような構成では、流路45を流れる液体が、検知物質が配置された位置を通過すると、検知物質は溶解する。そのため、検知物質の輝度は低下する。検知物質の輝度の低下を確認することによって、液体の進行を確認するができる。すなわち、検知物質の輝度が低下しているか否かに基づいて、流路45を流れる液体が正常に流れているかを判定することができる。検知物質は流路45を流れる液体の通過を確認できるものであればよく、特に限定されない。 Furthermore, in at least one of the branched flow paths 45, the flow path substrate 4A may have a sensing substance located at a position farther from the liquid receiving section 41 than the storage section 46, which detects the passage of the liquid flowing through the flow path 45. The flow path 45 may be a space that branches at the branch flow path 42 and then communicates with the second storage section 48 via the storage section 46. For example, the position farther from the liquid receiving section 41 than the storage section 46 is the position where the liquid received by the liquid receiving section 41 reaches after flowing through the flow path 45 and passing through the storage section 46. The sensing substance may also be a fluorescent substance that is soluble in the liquid flowing through the flow path 45. In this configuration, when the liquid flowing through the flow path 45 passes the position where the sensing substance is arranged, the sensing substance dissolves. Therefore, the luminance of the sensing substance decreases. By checking the decrease in the luminance of the sensing substance, the progress of the liquid can be confirmed. In other words, based on whether the luminance of the sensing substance has decreased, it is possible to determine whether the liquid flowing through the flow path 45 is flowing normally. The detection substance is not particularly limited as long as it can confirm the passage of liquid flowing through the flow channel 45.

 第2貯留部48は、貯留部46A~46Dの少なくとも1つに接続されていればよい。但し、流路基板4Aは、第2貯留部48を有していなくてもよい。 The second storage section 48 only needs to be connected to at least one of the storage sections 46A to 46D. However, the flow path substrate 4A does not need to have the second storage section 48.

 また、流路基板4Aは、流路45の下流において、流路45に接続された排出口49を有していてもよい。排出口49は、貯留部46の下流において、貯留部46に接続されていてもよい。図5に示すように、流路基板4Aが第2貯留部48を有する場合、排出口49は、第2貯留部48の下流において、第2貯留部48に接続されていてもよい。排出口49は、受液部41から排出口49までの間に位置する空間内の空気又は液体を、流路基板4Aの外部に排出するベントである。受液部41から排出口49までの間に位置する空間、すなわち流路45を含む流路基板4A内に位置する空間を、流路と称してもよい。 Furthermore, the flow path substrate 4A may have an outlet 49 connected to the flow path 45 downstream of the flow path 45. The outlet 49 may be connected to the storage section 46 downstream of the storage section 46. As shown in FIG. 5, when the flow path substrate 4A has a second storage section 48, the outlet 49 may be connected to the second storage section 48 downstream of the second storage section 48. The outlet 49 is a vent that discharges air or liquid in the space located between the liquid receiving section 41 and the outlet 49 to the outside of the flow path substrate 4A. The space located between the liquid receiving section 41 and the outlet 49, i.e., the space located in the flow path substrate 4A including the flow path 45, may be referred to as a flow path.

 (試薬の配置位置)
 本実施形態では、流路45に第1試薬101および第2試薬102が配置される場合、当該流路45には、少なくともプライマーおよび酵素が配置されていればよい。それ以外の試薬については、流路45以外の位置に配置されてもよい。例えば、dNTP、NTP、RNA分解酵素阻害剤、トレハロースおよび界面活性剤は、流路45よりも上流に配置されてもよい。例えば、これらの試薬は、流路45A~45Dの分岐位置に配置されてもよい。例えば、これらの試薬は、受液部41および/または分岐流路42に配置されてもよい。また例えば、標準物質は、流路45の下流に配置されてもよい。例えば、標準物質は、貯留部46に配置されてもよい。
(Reagent placement position)
In this embodiment, when the first reagent 101 and the second reagent 102 are placed in the flow path 45, at least a primer and an enzyme may be placed in the flow path 45. Other reagents may be placed at positions other than the flow path 45. For example, dNTP, NTP, RNase inhibitor, trehalose, and surfactant may be placed upstream of the flow path 45. For example, these reagents may be placed at branching positions of the flow paths 45A to 45D. For example, these reagents may be placed in the liquid receiving section 41 and/or the branch flow path 42. Also, for example, the standard substance may be placed downstream of the flow path 45. For example, the standard substance may be placed in the storage section 46.

 (流路等の数)
 本実施形態では、流路基板4Aは、4つの流路45を備えるが、これに限られない。本実施形態では、流路基板4Aは、第1領域451および第2領域452を有する流路45を少なくとも1つ備えていればよい。本実施形態において、流路基板4Aが第1領域451および第2領域452を有する流路45を複数備える場合、これらの流路45は、同一の検出対象物を検出するために用いられる流路として機能してよい。すなわち、複数の流路45に配置される第1試薬101は同一の試薬であってよく、複数の流路45に配置される第2試薬102は同一の試薬であってよい。また、流路基板4Aが第1領域451および第2領域452を有する流路45を複数備える場合、これらの流路45は、異なる検出対象物を検出するために用いられる流路として機能してよい。すなわち、複数の流路45に配置される第1試薬101はそれぞれ異なる試薬であってよく、複数の流路45に配置される第2試薬102はそれぞれ異なる試薬であってよい。
(Number of flow paths, etc.)
In this embodiment, the flow path substrate 4A includes four flow paths 45, but is not limited thereto. In this embodiment, the flow path substrate 4A may include at least one flow path 45 having a first region 451 and a second region 452. In this embodiment, when the flow path substrate 4A includes a plurality of flow paths 45 having a first region 451 and a second region 452, these flow paths 45 may function as flow paths used to detect the same detection target. That is, the first reagent 101 arranged in the plurality of flow paths 45 may be the same reagent, and the second reagent 102 arranged in the plurality of flow paths 45 may be the same reagent. In addition, when the flow path substrate 4A includes a plurality of flow paths 45 having a first region 451 and a second region 452, these flow paths 45 may function as flow paths used to detect different detection targets. That is, the first reagent 101 arranged in the plurality of flow paths 45 may be different reagents, and the second reagent 102 arranged in the plurality of flow paths 45 may be different reagents.

 流路基板4Aは、少なくとも1つのポジティブコントロール用の流路45を備えていてもよい。すなわち、検出対象を意図的に含ませた液体を流すための流路45を備えていてもよい。ポジティブコントロール用の流路45には、上流側から第1領域451および第2領域452が配置されていてよい。ポジティブコントロール用の流路45には、第1試薬101および第2試薬と反応する検出対象を意図的に含ませた液体が流されてよい。但し、検体を含む液体を流すために用いられる、第1領域451および第2領域452を有する流路45を、ポジティブコントロール用の流路45として代用してもよい。 The flow path substrate 4A may have at least one flow path 45 for a positive control. That is, it may have a flow path 45 for flowing a liquid that is intentionally containing a detection target. The flow path 45 for the positive control may have a first region 451 and a second region 452 arranged from the upstream side. A liquid that is intentionally containing a detection target that reacts with the first reagent 101 and the second reagent may be flowed in the flow path 45 for the positive control. However, the flow path 45 having the first region 451 and the second region 452 used for flowing a liquid containing a sample may be substituted as the flow path 45 for the positive control.

 貯留部46の数は、接続される流路45の数によって決まってよい。 The number of storage sections 46 may be determined by the number of flow paths 45 to which they are connected.

 (内部標準の配置位置)
 本実施形態では、内部標準47は、流路基板4Aに配置されているが、これに限られない。内部標準47は、流路基板4Aではなく、カートリッジ2の筐体の表面に配置されてもよい。この場合、内部標準47は、本体部21の窓部211の近傍に配置されてよい。内部標準47は、分岐流路42、流路45、貯留部46とは異なる領域に位置してもよい。
(Position of internal standard)
In this embodiment, the internal standard 47 is disposed on the flow path substrate 4A, but is not limited to this. The internal standard 47 may be disposed on the surface of the housing of the cartridge 2, instead of on the flow path substrate 4A. In this case, the internal standard 47 may be disposed near the window portion 211 of the main body portion 21. The internal standard 47 may be located in a region different from the branch flow path 42, the flow path 45, and the storage portion 46.

 〔第1形態に係る流路基板の製造方法〕
 図7は、流路基板4Aの製造方法の一例を示すフローチャートである。本製造方法は、流路基板4Aを製造する製造装置により実行されてよい。
[Method of manufacturing the flow path substrate according to the first embodiment]
7 is a flow chart showing an example of a method for manufacturing the flow path substrate 4 A. This manufacturing method may be performed by a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the flow path substrate 4 A.

 図7に示すように、まず、基板に、受液部41および流路45を形成してよい(S1;形成工程)。本実施形態では、基板に、受液部41および流路45の他、分岐流路42、貯留部46、第2貯留部48、および、排出口49を形成してよい。 As shown in FIG. 7, first, the liquid receiving portion 41 and the flow path 45 may be formed on the substrate (S1; formation process). In this embodiment, in addition to the liquid receiving portion 41 and the flow path 45, a branch flow path 42, a storage portion 46, a second storage portion 48, and a discharge port 49 may be formed on the substrate.

 受液部41および流路45等は、例えば、以下のように形成されてよい。例えば、基板に、受液部41および流路45等の形状がパターニングされた鋳型を配置した後、樹脂を流し込む。樹脂が硬化した後、鋳型を取り除く。鋳型を取り除いた後、硬化した樹脂上に蓋を設けることにより、基板上に受液部41および流路45等が形成されてよい。 The liquid receiving portion 41 and the flow path 45 may be formed, for example, as follows. For example, a mold in which the shapes of the liquid receiving portion 41 and the flow path 45 are patterned is placed on a substrate, and then resin is poured in. After the resin has hardened, the mold is removed. After the mold is removed, a lid is placed on the hardened resin, thereby forming the liquid receiving portion 41 and the flow path 45 on the substrate.

 次に、流路45に試薬を配置してよい。本実施形態では、流路45Bに第1試薬101を配置してよい(S2;第1配置工程)。流路45Bに第1試薬101を塗布することにより、流路45Bに第1試薬101を配置してよい。また本実施形態では、流路45A,45Bに第2試薬102を配置してよい(S3;第2配置工程)。流路45A,45Bに第2試薬102を塗布することにより、流路45A,45Bに第2試薬102を配置してよい。 Next, a reagent may be placed in the flow path 45. In this embodiment, a first reagent 101 may be placed in the flow path 45B (S2; first placement step). The first reagent 101 may be placed in the flow path 45B by applying the first reagent 101 to the flow path 45B. Also, in this embodiment, a second reagent 102 may be placed in the flow paths 45A and 45B (S3; second placement step). The second reagent 102 may be placed in the flow paths 45A and 45B by applying the second reagent 102 to the flow paths 45A and 45B.

 次に、基板に、内部標準47を配置してよい(S4)。基板に内部標準47としての蛍光物質を塗布することにより、基板に内部標準47を配置してよい。次に、第2貯留部48に蛍光物質を塗布することにより、第2貯留部48に蛍光物質を配置してもよい(S5)。S2~S5の処理順は問わない。S2~S5の処理が並行して行われてもよい。 Next, an internal standard 47 may be placed on the substrate (S4). The internal standard 47 may be placed on the substrate by applying a fluorescent substance as the internal standard 47 to the substrate. Next, the fluorescent substance may be placed in the second storage section 48 by applying the fluorescent substance to the second storage section 48 (S5). The order of the processes from S2 to S5 does not matter. The processes from S2 to S5 may be performed in parallel.

 図8は、流路基板4Aが備える流路45への試薬100の塗布方法の一例を示す模式図である。図9の符号1131は、試薬100が塗布された流路45の一例を示す平面模式図であり、図9の符号1132は、流路45への試薬100の塗布方法の別例を示す模式図である。図8および図9における試薬100は、第1試薬101または第2試薬102であってよい。 FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a method of applying a reagent 100 to a flow path 45 provided in a flow path substrate 4A. Reference numeral 1131 in FIG. 9 is a schematic plan view showing an example of a flow path 45 to which the reagent 100 has been applied, and reference numeral 1132 in FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing another example of a method of applying the reagent 100 to the flow path 45. The reagent 100 in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 may be the first reagent 101 or the second reagent 102.

 試薬100の塗布は、例えば、インクジェットプリンタを用いて行われてよい。インクジェットプリンタを用いることにより、試薬100の微細な塗布が可能となる。インクジェットプリンタは、試薬100を吐出するヘッド201を備えていてよい。図8の符号1121に示すように、インクジェットプリンタは、ヘッド201から試薬100を吐出することにより、図8の符号1122に示すように、流路45に試薬100を付着させてよい。流路45に付着した試薬100は、自然乾燥されてよい。 The application of the reagent 100 may be performed, for example, using an inkjet printer. Using an inkjet printer allows for fine application of the reagent 100. The inkjet printer may include a head 201 that ejects the reagent 100. As shown by reference numeral 1121 in FIG. 8, the inkjet printer may eject the reagent 100 from the head 201, thereby adhering the reagent 100 to the flow path 45, as shown by reference numeral 1122 in FIG. 8. The reagent 100 that has adhered to the flow path 45 may be allowed to dry naturally.

 インクジェットプリンタは、ヘッド201を流路45の延伸方向に沿って移動させながら、試薬100を塗布することにより、図9の符号1131に示すように、複数の試薬100を流路45の底部454に付着させてよい。 The inkjet printer may apply the reagent 100 while moving the head 201 along the extension direction of the flow channel 45, thereby adhering multiple reagents 100 to the bottom 454 of the flow channel 45, as shown by reference numeral 1131 in FIG. 9.

 インクジェットプリンタは、複数の付着物を、それぞれ独立して(離隔して)底部454に配置するように、ヘッド201の移動および試薬100の吐出を制御してよい。また、インクジェットプリンタは、付着物が流路45の内壁455に接触しないように、ヘッド201の移動および試薬100の吐出を制御してよい。 The inkjet printer may control the movement of the head 201 and the ejection of the reagent 100 so that the multiple deposits are placed independently (separately) on the bottom 454. The inkjet printer may also control the movement of the head 201 and the ejection of the reagent 100 so that the deposits do not come into contact with the inner wall 455 of the flow path 45.

 図9の符号1131に示すように、インクジェットプリンタは、複数の付着物が、流路45の延伸方向とは異なる方向に、独立して並んで配置されるように、ヘッド201の移動および試薬100の吐出を制御してもよい。複数の付着物は、例えば、流路45の幅方向に並んで配置されてよい。また、図9の符号1132に示すように、流路45に配置した乾燥済みの試薬100の上から、新たな試薬100を塗布してもよい。 As shown by reference numeral 1131 in FIG. 9, the inkjet printer may control the movement of the head 201 and the ejection of the reagent 100 so that multiple attachments are arranged independently side by side in a direction different from the extension direction of the flow channel 45. The multiple attachments may be arranged side by side, for example, in the width direction of the flow channel 45. Also, as shown by reference numeral 1132 in FIG. 9, new reagent 100 may be applied from above the dried reagent 100 arranged in the flow channel 45.

 〔流路基板の第2形態〕
 図10は、流路基板4Bの一例を示す平面図である。図11は、流路基板4Bが備える流路45における検出試薬の配置例を示す模式図である。流路基板4Bは、流路基板4の一例である。
[Second embodiment of flow path substrate]
Fig. 10 is a plan view showing an example of a flow path substrate 4B. Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the arrangement of detection reagents in a flow path 45 included in the flow path substrate 4B. The flow path substrate 4B is an example of the flow path substrate 4.

 図10に示すように、流路基板4Bは、液体が流れる複数の流路45A~45Dと、複数の流路45のそれぞれに接続する複数の貯留部46A~46Dと、を備えていてよい。複数の流路45は、検出対象物を検出する検出試薬である第1検出試薬の少なくとも一部が位置する第1流路と、第1検出試薬とは異なる検出対象物を検出する検出試薬である第2検出試薬の少なくとも一部が位置する第2流路と、を有していてよい。検出試薬は、検出対象物と反応する試薬の一例であってよい。検出対象物は、例えば、検出対象由来の核酸であってよい。これにより、流路基板4Bに液体を導入するという簡単な操作により、互いに異なる複数の検出対象物を一度に検出できる。 As shown in FIG. 10, the flow path substrate 4B may include a plurality of flow paths 45A-45D through which liquid flows, and a plurality of storage sections 46A-46D connected to each of the plurality of flow paths 45. The plurality of flow paths 45 may include a first flow path in which at least a portion of a first detection reagent, which is a detection reagent for detecting a detection target, is located, and a second flow path in which at least a portion of a second detection reagent, which is a detection reagent for detecting a detection target different from the first detection reagent, is located. The detection reagent may be an example of a reagent that reacts with the detection target. The detection target may be, for example, a nucleic acid derived from the detection target. This makes it possible to detect a plurality of detection targets that are different from each other at once by the simple operation of introducing liquid into the flow path substrate 4B.

 本実施形態では、図10に示すように、流路基板4Bは、受液部41と、分岐流路42と、複数の流路45A~45Dと、複数の貯留部46A~46Dと、内部標準47とを備えていてよい。流路基板4Bは、第2貯留部48および排出口49を備えていてもよい。 In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the flow path substrate 4B may include a liquid receiving section 41, a branch flow path 42, a plurality of flow paths 45A-45D, a plurality of storage sections 46A-46D, and an internal standard 47. The flow path substrate 4B may also include a second storage section 48 and an outlet 49.

 流路45A~45Dは、受液部41に接続した分岐流路42から分岐していてよい。但し、流路基板4Bは、分岐流路42を備えていなくてもよい。この場合、流路45A~45Dは、受液部41から分岐していてもよい。流路45A~45Dが受液部41または分岐流路42から分岐していることにより、受液部41において受け入れた液体を複数の流路45A~45Dへと導入させることができる。従って、複数の流路45A~45Dのそれぞれへの液体の導入を必要とせずに、互いに異なる複数の検出対象物を一度に検出できる。 The flow paths 45A-45D may branch off from a branch flow path 42 connected to the liquid receiving section 41. However, the flow path substrate 4B does not have to have a branch flow path 42. In this case, the flow paths 45A-45D may branch off from the liquid receiving section 41. By having the flow paths 45A-45D branch off from the liquid receiving section 41 or the branch flow path 42, the liquid received in the liquid receiving section 41 can be introduced into the multiple flow paths 45A-45D. Therefore, multiple different detection targets can be detected at once without the need to introduce liquid into each of the multiple flow paths 45A-45D.

 また、流路45A~45Dの全ては、1つの受液部41、または、1つの受液部41に接続した分岐流路42から分岐していてよい。これにより、1つの受液部41において受け入れた液体を複数の流路45A~45Dへと導入することができる。従って、一度の液体の導入によって互いに異なる複数の検出対象物を一度に検出できる。 Furthermore, all of the flow paths 45A-45D may branch off from a single liquid receiving section 41, or from a branch flow path 42 connected to a single liquid receiving section 41. This allows the liquid received in a single liquid receiving section 41 to be introduced into multiple flow paths 45A-45D. Therefore, multiple different detection targets can be detected at once by introducing the liquid once.

 また、検出試薬は、流路45A~45Dの分岐位置に対して、受液部41の反対側に配置されていてよい。これにより、異なる検出試薬が混合する可能性を低減できる。例えば、第1検出試薬と第2検出試薬とが混合する可能性を低減できる。 The detection reagent may be disposed on the opposite side of the liquid receiving section 41 from the branching position of the flow paths 45A to 45D. This reduces the possibility of different detection reagents mixing. For example, it reduces the possibility of the first detection reagent and the second detection reagent mixing.

 流路基板4Bは、複数の流路45が第1流路及び第2流路を有している点で流路基板4Aと異なる。以降では、流路基板4Bについて、流路基板4Aと異なる点についてのみ説明する。つまり、流路基板4Bについて、流路基板4Aにおいて説明した内容については、本実施形態での説明を省略する。 Flow path substrate 4B differs from flow path substrate 4A in that the multiple flow paths 45 have a first flow path and a second flow path. In the following, only the differences between flow path substrate 4B and flow path substrate 4A will be described. In other words, the contents of flow path substrate 4B that were described for flow path substrate 4A will not be described in this embodiment.

 本実施形態では、流路基板4Bは、上記第1流路として流路45Bを備え、上記第2流路として流路45Cを備えていてよい。図10に示すように、流路45Bの第1領域451Bおよび第2領域452Bが配置され、流路45Cには第1領域451Cおよび第2領域452Cが配置されてよい。 In this embodiment, the flow path substrate 4B may include a flow path 45B as the first flow path, and a flow path 45C as the second flow path. As shown in FIG. 10, a first region 451B and a second region 452B may be arranged in the flow path 45B, and a first region 451C and a second region 452C may be arranged in the flow path 45C.

 図11に示すように、第1領域451Bには、第1検出試薬として第1試薬1011が配置されていてよい。第1領域451Cには、第2検出試薬として、第1試薬1011とは異なる第1試薬1012が配置されていてよい。第1試薬1011,1012は第1試薬101の一例である。第1試薬1011が第2検出試薬、第1試薬1012が第1検出試薬であってもよい。 As shown in FIG. 11, a first reagent 1011 may be placed in the first region 451B as a first detection reagent. A first reagent 1012 different from the first reagent 1011 may be placed in the first region 451C as a second detection reagent. The first reagents 1011 and 1012 are examples of the first reagent 101. The first reagent 1011 may be the second detection reagent, and the first reagent 1012 may be the first detection reagent.

 流路45には検出試薬の少なくとも一部が位置していてもよいし、検出試薬のすべてが位置していてもよい。例えば、検出試薬の一部は流路45に位置し、検出試薬の一部を除いた残りは貯留部46に位置してもよい。ここで、検出試薬の少なくとも一部とは、検出試薬に複数種類の試薬が含まれる場合の一部の種類の試薬であってもよい。例えば、第1試薬1011,1012が流路45に位置し、第2試薬1021,1022は貯留部46に位置していてもよい。また、検出試薬のうちの略同一の成分が流路45と流路45以外の位置との双方に配置されていてもよい。例えば、検出試薬のうちの略同一の成分が流路45と貯留部46とに位置していてもよい。 At least a portion of the detection reagent may be located in the flow path 45, or all of the detection reagent may be located there. For example, a portion of the detection reagent may be located in the flow path 45, and the remainder of the detection reagent may be located in the storage section 46. Here, "at least a portion of the detection reagent" may refer to some types of reagents when the detection reagent contains multiple types of reagents. For example, the first reagents 1011 and 1012 may be located in the flow path 45, and the second reagents 1021 and 1022 may be located in the storage section 46. Furthermore, substantially the same components of the detection reagent may be located in both the flow path 45 and a position other than the flow path 45. For example, substantially the same components of the detection reagent may be located in the flow path 45 and the storage section 46.

 第1試薬1011,1012は、検出対象由来の核酸分子の配列に相補的な配列を有するプライマーであってよい。プライマーは、標的の核酸分子を増幅可能なものが必要に応じて加えられればよく、例えば1種類であってもよいし、3種類以上であってもよい。本実施形態では、第1試薬1011,1012は、例えば、第1プライマー、および、第2プライマーであってよい。流路基板4Bに検出試薬としてプライマーが配置されることにより、受液部41において受け入れた液体に検出対象由来の核酸が含まれている場合、流路45において検出対象由来の核酸を増幅させることができる。 The first reagents 1011 and 1012 may be primers having a sequence complementary to the sequence of a nucleic acid molecule derived from the detection target. The primers may be added as necessary as long as they are capable of amplifying the target nucleic acid molecule, and may be, for example, one type or three or more types. In this embodiment, the first reagents 1011 and 1012 may be, for example, a first primer and a second primer. By arranging the primers as detection reagents on the flow path substrate 4B, when the liquid received in the liquid receiving section 41 contains nucleic acid derived from the detection target, the nucleic acid derived from the detection target can be amplified in the flow path 45.

 但し、第1試薬1012は、第1試薬1011と配列の異なるプライマーであってよい。第1試薬1012は、第1試薬1011と異なる検出対象由来の核酸分子の配列に相補的な配列を有するプライマーであってよい。例えば、第1試薬1011は、第1検出対象物由来の核酸分子の配列に相補的な配列を有するプライマーであり、第1試薬1012は、第1検出対象物と異なる第2検出対象物由来の核酸分子の配列に相補的な配列を有するプライマーであってよい。これにより、第1試薬1011と反応する第1検出対象物とは異なる第2検出対象物を、第1試薬1012と反応させることができる。第1検出対象物および第2検出対象物は、検出対象物の一例である。 However, the first reagent 1012 may be a primer having a different sequence from the first reagent 1011. The first reagent 1012 may be a primer having a sequence complementary to the sequence of a nucleic acid molecule derived from a detection target different from the first reagent 1011. For example, the first reagent 1011 may be a primer having a sequence complementary to the sequence of a nucleic acid molecule derived from a first detection target, and the first reagent 1012 may be a primer having a sequence complementary to the sequence of a nucleic acid molecule derived from a second detection target different from the first detection target. This makes it possible to react the second detection target, which is different from the first detection target that reacts with the first reagent 1011, with the first reagent 1012. The first detection target and the second detection target are examples of detection targets.

 従って、受液部41から流路45Bに流れ込んだ液体に第1検出対象物が含まれている場合には、流路45Bにおいて、第1検出対象物を増幅させることを可能とする。受液部41から流路45Cに流れ込んだ液体に第2検出対象物が含まれている場合には、流路45Cにおいて、第2検出対象物を増幅させることを可能とする。つまり、受液部41において受け入れた液体を複数の流路45へと導入し、互いに異なる複数の対象を検出対象として一度に核酸増幅することができる。 Therefore, if the liquid flowing from the liquid receiving section 41 into the flow path 45B contains a first detection target, the first detection target can be amplified in the flow path 45B. If the liquid flowing from the liquid receiving section 41 into the flow path 45C contains a second detection target, the second detection target can be amplified in the flow path 45C. In other words, the liquid received in the liquid receiving section 41 can be introduced into multiple flow paths 45, and multiple different targets can be used as detection targets to amplify nucleic acids at once.

 第1試薬1011,1012には、例えば、dNTPs、NTPs、トレハロース、および、RNA分解酵素阻害剤が含まれていてよい。但し、RNA分解酵素阻害剤がボトル部22に収容されている場合には、RNA分解酵素阻害剤は、第1試薬1011,1012に含まれていなくてよい。 The first reagents 1011 and 1012 may contain, for example, dNTPs, NTPs, trehalose, and an RNase inhibitor. However, if an RNase inhibitor is contained in the bottle portion 22, the RNase inhibitor does not need to be contained in the first reagents 1011 and 1012.

 また、図11に示すように、第2領域452Bには、第1検出試薬として第2試薬1021が配置されていてよい。第2領域452Cには、第2検出試薬として、第2試薬1021とは異なる第2試薬1022が配置されていてよい。第2試薬1021,1022は第2試薬102の一例である。第2試薬1021が第2検出試薬、第2試薬1022が第1検出試薬であってもよい。 Also, as shown in FIG. 11, a second reagent 1021 may be placed in the second region 452B as the first detection reagent. A second reagent 1022 different from the second reagent 1021 may be placed in the second region 452C as the second detection reagent. The second reagents 1021 and 1022 are examples of the second reagent 102. The second reagent 1021 may be the second detection reagent, and the second reagent 1022 may be the first detection reagent.

 第2試薬1021,1022は、例えば、酵素として、AMV-RT(Avian Myeloblastosis Virus)、RNase H(Ribonuclease H)、および、T7 RNA polymeraseといった酵素であってよい。但し、第2試薬1022は、第2試薬1021と配列の異なる酵素であってよい。 The second reagents 1021 and 1022 may be, for example, enzymes such as AMV-RT (Avian Myeloblastosis Virus), RNase H (Ribonuclease H), and T7 RNA polymerase. However, the second reagent 1022 may be an enzyme with a different sequence from the second reagent 1021.

 これにより、第2試薬1021と反応する第1検出対象物とは異なる第2検出対象物について、第2試薬1022と反応させることができる。従って、受液部41から流路45Bに流れ込んだ液体に第1検出対象物が含まれている場合には、流路45Bにおいて、第1検出対象物を増幅させることを可能とする。受液部41から流路45Cに流れ込んだ液体に第2検出対象物が含まれている場合には、流路45Cにおいて、第2検出対象物を増幅させることを可能とする。 This allows the second detection object, which is different from the first detection object that reacts with the second reagent 1021, to react with the second reagent 1022. Therefore, if the first detection object is contained in the liquid that has flowed from the liquid receiving section 41 into the flow path 45B, the first detection object can be amplified in the flow path 45B. If the second detection object is contained in the liquid that has flowed from the liquid receiving section 41 into the flow path 45C, the second detection object can be amplified in the flow path 45C.

 第2試薬1021,1022には、例えば、トレハロース、界面活性剤が含まれていてよい。 The second reagents 1021 and 1022 may contain, for example, trehalose and a surfactant.

 流路45には、さらに、検出試薬として、標識物質が配置されていてよい。各流路45において検出対象となる物質が互いに異なる場合、標識物質は、互いに異なる検出対象物に対応する配列を有する標識物質であってよい。本実施形態では、流路45Bに配置される標識物質と、流路45Cに配置される標識物質とは互いに異なっていてよい。これにより、検出対象物の種類に対応して、検出対象物に標識物質を結合させることができる。本実施形態では、標識物質は、第2領域452B,452Cに配置されていてよい。 The flow path 45 may further include a labeling substance disposed therein as a detection reagent. When the substances to be detected in each flow path 45 are different from each other, the labeling substance may have a sequence corresponding to the different detection targets. In this embodiment, the labeling substance disposed in flow path 45B and the labeling substance disposed in flow path 45C may be different from each other. This allows the labeling substance to bind to the detection target in accordance with the type of detection target. In this embodiment, the labeling substance may be disposed in the second regions 452B and 452C.

 また、流路基板4Bは、第1流路および第2流路として機能しない流路45を備えていてもよい。つまり、流路基板4Bでは、検出試薬を配置せず、検出対象物の検出を目的としない流路45が分岐流路42に接続されていてもよい。 Furthermore, the flow path substrate 4B may have a flow path 45 that does not function as the first flow path or the second flow path. In other words, in the flow path substrate 4B, a detection reagent may not be disposed, and a flow path 45 that is not intended for detecting a detection target may be connected to the branch flow path 42.

 流路基板4Bは、少なくとも標識物質が配置され、核酸の増幅を行う酵素など核酸増幅に用いる要素の少なくとも1つが配置されていないネガティブコントロール用の流路45を備えていてよい。図10では、流路45Aは、少なくとも標識物質が配置されたネガティブコントロール用の流路であってよい。流路45Aは、標識物質を含む第2試薬102を配置した第2領域452Aを有していてよい。また、流路基板4Bは、検出試薬が配置されていない流路45を備えていてもよい。図10では、流路45Dは、検出試薬が配置されていない流路であってよい。 The flow path substrate 4B may include a negative control flow path 45 in which at least a labeling substance is arranged and at least one of the elements used in nucleic acid amplification, such as an enzyme that amplifies nucleic acids, is not arranged. In FIG. 10, the flow path 45A may be a negative control flow path in which at least a labeling substance is arranged. The flow path 45A may have a second region 452A in which a second reagent 102 containing a labeling substance is arranged. The flow path substrate 4B may also include a flow path 45 in which no detection reagent is arranged. In FIG. 10, the flow path 45D may be a flow path in which no detection reagent is arranged.

 各貯留部46において検出対象とする物質の種類が異なる場合、これらの貯留部46に接続される流路45のそれぞれに配置される検出試薬のうち、少なくともプライマーおよび標識物質の配列が、互いに異なっていればよい。つまり、当該流路45のそれぞれに配置される検出試薬の一部は、同一の試薬であってもよい。互いに異なる検出対象物に対して同一の試薬を用いることにより、より安価に流路基板4Bを製造できる。例えば、当該流路45のそれぞれに配置される酵素については、同一の試薬であってもよい。また、当該流路45のそれぞれに配置されるdNTPsおよびNTPsについても、同一の試薬であってよい。さらに、RNA分解酵素阻害剤、トレハロースおよび界面活性剤についても、同一の試薬であってよい。 When the types of substances to be detected in each storage section 46 are different, at least the sequences of the primers and labeling substances in the detection reagents placed in each of the flow paths 45 connected to these storage sections 46 need to be different from each other. In other words, some of the detection reagents placed in each of the flow paths 45 may be the same reagent. By using the same reagent for different detection targets, the flow path substrate 4B can be manufactured more inexpensively. For example, the enzymes placed in each of the flow paths 45 may be the same reagent. Furthermore, the dNTPs and NTPs placed in each of the flow paths 45 may also be the same reagent. Furthermore, the RNase inhibitor, trehalose, and surfactant may also be the same reagent.

 同一の試薬は、互いに異なる検出試薬が配置された複数の流路45において、受液部41と反対側に位置していてよい。つまり、同一の試薬は、流路45において、互いに異なる検出試薬が配置された位置の下流に配置されていればよい。例えば、上述したように、流路45B,45Cにおいて、同一の試薬としての酵素は、プライマーが配置された第1領域451B,451Cの下流に位置する第2領域452B,452Cに配置されていてよい。また、流路45B,45Cにおいて、同一の試薬としてのdNTPおよびNTPについても、例えば、第2領域452B,452Cに配置されていてよい。但し、同一の試薬としてのdNTP、NTP、RNA分解酵素阻害剤、トレハロースおよび界面活性剤は、受液部41および/または分岐流路42に配置されていてもよい。 The same reagent may be located on the opposite side of the liquid receiving section 41 in the multiple flow paths 45 in which the different detection reagents are arranged. In other words, the same reagent may be located downstream of the position in the flow path 45 where the different detection reagents are arranged. For example, as described above, in the flow paths 45B and 45C, the enzyme as the same reagent may be located in the second region 452B and 452C located downstream of the first region 451B and 451C in which the primer is arranged. In addition, in the flow paths 45B and 45C, the dNTP and NTP as the same reagent may also be located in the second region 452B and 452C, for example. However, the dNTP, NTP, RNase inhibitor, trehalose, and surfactant as the same reagent may be located in the liquid receiving section 41 and/or the branch flow path 42.

 また、複数の流路45のそれぞれにおいて、液体の送液方向に沿った検出試薬の貯留部46とは反対側の端から貯留部46側の端までの複数の流路45の長さは、互いに略同一であってよい。つまり、各流路45において、検出試薬が配置された領域の、流路45の延伸方向に沿った長さは、互いに略同一であってよい。これにより、各流路45において、検出試薬が配置された領域を液体が通過する時間を略同一とすることができる。従って、各流路45において、検出対象物と検出試薬との反応時間を略同一にすることができる。 Furthermore, in each of the multiple flow paths 45, the length of the multiple flow paths 45 from the end opposite the storage section 46 of the detection reagent along the liquid delivery direction to the end on the storage section 46 side may be approximately the same. In other words, in each flow path 45, the length of the area in which the detection reagent is arranged along the extension direction of the flow path 45 may be approximately the same. This makes it possible to make the time it takes for the liquid to pass through the area in which the detection reagent is arranged approximately the same in each flow path 45. Therefore, it is possible to make the reaction time between the detection target and the detection reagent approximately the same in each flow path 45.

 図11に示すように、本実施形態では、流路45B,45Cにおいて長さLBと長さLCとは互いに略同一であってよい。長さLBは、第1領域451Bにおける貯留部46Bと反対側の端から、第2領域452Bにおける貯留部46B側までの長さである。長さLCは、第1領域451Cにおける貯留部46Cと反対側の端から、第2領域452Cにおける貯留部46C側までの長さである。第1試薬1011が配置された第1領域451Bの長さL1Bと、第1試薬1012が配置された第1領域451Cの長さL1Cとは、互いに略同一であってよいし、互いに異なっていてもよい。また、流路45B,45Cにおいて、第2試薬1021が配置された第2領域452Bの長さL2Bと、第2試薬1022が配置された第2領域452Cの長さL2Cとは、互いに略同一であってもよいし、互いに異なっていてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, lengths LB and LC in flow paths 45B and 45C may be approximately the same as each other. Length LB is the length from the end of first region 451B opposite storage section 46B to the storage section 46B side in second region 452B. Length LC is the length from the end of first region 451C opposite storage section 46C to the storage section 46C side in second region 452C. Length L1B of first region 451B in which first reagent 1011 is arranged and length L1C of first region 451C in which first reagent 1012 is arranged may be approximately the same as each other or may be different from each other. In addition, in the flow paths 45B and 45C, the length L2B of the second region 452B in which the second reagent 1021 is disposed and the length L2C of the second region 452C in which the second reagent 1022 is disposed may be approximately the same as each other or may be different from each other.

 図12は、複数の流路45の使用例を説明するための模式図である。図12に示すように、例えば、流路45Bは、第1試薬1011を配置した第1領域451Bと、第2試薬1021を配置した第2領域452Bとを有していてよい。流路45Cは、第1試薬1012を配置した第1領域451Cと、第2試薬1022を配置した第2領域452Cとを有していてよい。流路45Dは、第1試薬1013を配置した第1領域451Dと、第2試薬1023を配置した第2領域452Dとを有していてよい。第1試薬1011,1012,1013は、互いに異なる検出試薬であってよい。第2試薬1021,1022,1023は、互いに異なる検出試薬であってよい。また、流路45Aは、少なくとも標識物質が配置され、核酸の増幅を行う酵素など核酸増幅に用いる要素の少なくとも1つが配置されていないネガティブコントロール用の流路であってよい。 FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the use of multiple flow paths 45. As shown in FIG. 12, for example, flow path 45B may have a first region 451B in which first reagent 1011 is arranged, and a second region 452B in which second reagent 1021 is arranged. Flow path 45C may have a first region 451C in which first reagent 1012 is arranged, and a second region 452C in which second reagent 1022 is arranged. Flow path 45D may have a first region 451D in which first reagent 1013 is arranged, and a second region 452D in which second reagent 1023 is arranged. The first reagents 1011, 1012, and 1013 may be detection reagents different from each other. The second reagents 1021, 1022, and 1023 may be detection reagents different from each other. In addition, flow channel 45A may be a negative control flow channel in which at least a labeling substance is disposed, and at least one of the elements used in nucleic acid amplification, such as an enzyme that amplifies nucleic acids, is not disposed.

 このように、流路45A~45Dのそれぞれに、互いに異なる検出試薬を配置してもよい。但し、複数の流路45のうちの一部の流路45のそれぞれに、プライマーおよび標識物質を含めて同一の検出試薬が配置されてもよい。例えば、流路45Cに配置した第1試薬1012および第2試薬1022を、第1試薬1013および第2試薬1023の代わりに流路45Dに配置してもよい。 In this way, different detection reagents may be placed in each of the flow paths 45A to 45D. However, the same detection reagent, including the primer and labeling substance, may be placed in each of some of the multiple flow paths 45. For example, the first reagent 1012 and the second reagent 1022 placed in flow path 45C may be placed in flow path 45D instead of the first reagent 1013 and the second reagent 1023.

 つまり、流路基板4Bは、流路45として、第1検出試薬が配置された少なくとも1つの第1流路と、第2検出試薬が配置された少なくとも1つの第2流路と、を備えていればよい。これにより、複数の流路45に液体を導入するという簡単な操作により、複数の物質を検出対象とすることが可能となる。 In other words, the flow path substrate 4B only needs to have at least one first flow path in which a first detection reagent is disposed, and at least one second flow path in which a second detection reagent is disposed, as the flow paths 45. This makes it possible to detect multiple substances by the simple operation of introducing liquid into multiple flow paths 45.

 本実施形態では、受液部41から導入された液体が分岐流路42により分岐され、流路45A~45Dのそれぞれを流れ、貯留部46A~46Dのそれぞれに貯留される。液体に第1検出対象物が含まれている場合には、第1検出試薬が配置された第1流路を液体が流れることにより、第1検出対象物は第1検出試薬と反応する。また、液体に第2検出対象物が含まれている場合には、第2検出試薬が配置された第2流路を液体が流れることにより、第2検出対象物は第2検出試薬と反応する。 In this embodiment, the liquid introduced from the liquid receiving section 41 is branched by the branch flow path 42, flows through each of the flow paths 45A to 45D, and is stored in each of the storage sections 46A to 46D. If the liquid contains a first detection object, the first detection object reacts with the first detection reagent as the liquid flows through the first flow path in which the first detection reagent is placed. If the liquid contains a second detection object, the second detection object reacts with the second detection reagent as the liquid flows through the second flow path in which the second detection reagent is placed.

 従って、検出装置3は、第1流路に接続された貯留部46から発せられる蛍光の強度を測定することにより、第1検出対象物を検出できる。また、検出装置3は、第2流路に接続された貯留部46から発せられる蛍光の強度を測定することにより、第2検出対象物を検出できる。つまり、互いに異なる検出対象物を検出可能な検出試薬を、互いに異なる流路45に配置することにより、流路基板4Bに液体を導入するという簡単な操作により、検出装置3は、互いに異なる複数の検出対象物を一度に検出できる。 The detection device 3 can therefore detect a first detection target by measuring the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the storage section 46 connected to the first flow path. The detection device 3 can also detect a second detection target by measuring the intensity of the fluorescence emitted from the storage section 46 connected to the second flow path. In other words, by arranging detection reagents capable of detecting different detection targets in different flow paths 45, the detection device 3 can detect multiple different detection targets at once with the simple operation of introducing liquid into the flow path substrate 4B.

 流路基板4Bは、第1流路および第2流路として機能する少なくとも2つ以上の流路45を備えていればよい。図12に示すように、流路基板4Bは、第1試薬1014を配置した第1領域451Xと、第2試薬1024を配置した第2領域452Xとを有する流路45Xを備えていてよい。第1試薬1014は、第1試薬1011,1012,1013と異なっていてよい。第2試薬1024は、第2試薬1021,1022,1023と異なっていてよい。従って、検出装置3は、互いに異なる検出試薬を配置した流路45の数の分だけ、互いに異なる複数の検出対象物を一度に検出できる。 The flow path substrate 4B may have at least two or more flow paths 45 that function as a first flow path and a second flow path. As shown in FIG. 12, the flow path substrate 4B may have a flow path 45X having a first region 451X in which a first reagent 1014 is arranged, and a second region 452X in which a second reagent 1024 is arranged. The first reagent 1014 may be different from the first reagents 1011, 1012, and 1013. The second reagent 1024 may be different from the second reagents 1021, 1022, and 1023. Therefore, the detection device 3 can simultaneously detect a plurality of different detection targets equal to the number of flow paths 45 in which different detection reagents are arranged.

 第1試薬1011~1014の全てが互いに異なっていなくてもよい。第1試薬1011~1014のうちの何れか2つが、互いに異なる検出試薬であってよい。つまり、第1試薬1011~1014のうちの一部が第1検出試薬であり、別の一部が第2検出試薬であってよい。また、第2試薬1021~1024の全てが互いに異なっていなくてもよい。第2試薬1021~1024のうちの何れか2つが、互いに異なる検出試薬であってよい。つまり、第2試薬1021~1024のうちの一部が第1検出試薬であり、別の一部が第2検出試薬であってよい。 All of the first reagents 1011-1014 do not have to be different from each other. Any two of the first reagents 1011-1014 may be different detection reagents. In other words, some of the first reagents 1011-1014 may be the first detection reagent, and another part may be the second detection reagent. Also, all of the second reagents 1021-1024 do not have to be different from each other. Any two of the second reagents 1021-1024 may be different detection reagents. In other words, some of the second reagents 1021-1024 may be the first detection reagent, and another part may be the second detection reagent.

 流路基板4Bは、少なくとも1つのポジティブコントロール用の流路45を備えていてもよい。ポジティブコントロール用の流路45には、意図的に検出対象を含ませた液体と反応する検出試薬が配置されていてよい。但し、検体を含む液体を流すために用いられる、第1流路および/または第2流路として機能する流路45を、ポジティブコントロール用の流路45として代用してもよい。この場合、当該流路45には、当該流路45に配置された検出試薬と反応する検出対象を意図的に含ませた液体が流されてよい。 The flow path substrate 4B may have at least one flow path 45 for a positive control. A detection reagent that reacts with a liquid that is intentionally made to contain a detection target may be placed in the flow path 45 for a positive control. However, a flow path 45 that functions as a first flow path and/or a second flow path used to flow a liquid that contains a specimen may be substituted for the flow path 45 for a positive control. In this case, a liquid that is intentionally made to contain a detection target that reacts with the detection reagent placed in the flow path 45 may be flowed in the flow path 45.

 〔第2形態に係る流路基板の製造方法〕
 図13は、流路基板4Bの製造方法の一例を示すフローチャートである。本製造方法は、流路基板4Bを製造する製造装置により実行されてよい。
[Method of manufacturing a flow path substrate according to the second embodiment]
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a method for manufacturing the flow path substrate 4B. This manufacturing method may be performed by a manufacturing apparatus for manufacturing the flow path substrate 4B.

 図13に示すように、まず、基板に、流路45および貯留部46を形成してよい(S11)。本実施形態では、基板に、流路45および貯留部46の他、受液部41、分岐流路42、第2貯留部48、および、排出口49を形成してよい。 As shown in FIG. 13, first, a flow path 45 and a storage section 46 may be formed in a substrate (S11). In this embodiment, in addition to the flow path 45 and the storage section 46, a liquid receiving section 41, a branch flow path 42, a second storage section 48, and an outlet 49 may be formed in the substrate.

 次に、流路45に検出試薬を配置してよい。本実施形態では、流路45A~45Dのうちの何れかである第1流路に、検出試薬として第1検出試薬を配置してよい(S12)。流路45A~45Dのうち、第1検出試薬が配置された第1流路とは異なる第2流路に、第1検出試薬とは異なる第2検出試薬を配置してよい(S13)。次に、基板に、内部標準47としての蛍光物質を配置してよい(S14)。次に、第2貯留部48に蛍光物質を配置してもよい(S15)。S12~S15の処理順は問わない。S12~S15の処理が並行して行われてもよい。 Next, a detection reagent may be placed in the flow path 45. In this embodiment, a first detection reagent may be placed as a detection reagent in a first flow path, which is any one of the flow paths 45A to 45D (S12). A second detection reagent different from the first detection reagent may be placed in a second flow path, which is one of the flow paths 45A to 45D and different from the first flow path in which the first detection reagent is placed (S13). Next, a fluorescent substance may be placed on the substrate as an internal standard 47 (S14). Next, a fluorescent substance may be placed in the second storage section 48 (S15). The order of the processes of S12 to S15 does not matter. The processes of S12 to S15 may be performed in parallel.

 〔まとめ〕
 本開示の態様1に係る流路基板は、液体を受け入れる受液部と、前記受液部に接続する流路とを備え、前記流路は、プライマーを含む第1試薬が配置されている第1領域と、前記第1領域と異なる位置に核酸の増幅を行う酵素を含む第2試薬が配置されている第2領域とを有する。
〔summary〕
The flow path substrate according to aspect 1 of the present disclosure comprises a liquid receiving section for receiving a liquid and a flow path connected to the liquid receiving section, and the flow path has a first region in which a first reagent containing a primer is disposed, and a second region in which a second reagent containing an enzyme for amplifying nucleic acid is disposed at a position different from the first region.

 本開示の態様2に係る流路基板は、態様1において、前記第2領域は、前記第1領域が配置された位置に対して、前記受液部と反対側に配置されている。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 2 of the present disclosure is the same as that of aspect 1, except that the second region is disposed on the opposite side of the liquid receiving section from the position where the first region is disposed.

 本開示の態様3に係る流路基板は、態様1または2において、前記流路は、前記第2領域の下流に、増幅された核酸を含む液体を貯留する貯留部をさらに備える。 In the flow path substrate according to aspect 3 of the present disclosure, in aspect 1 or 2, the flow path further includes a reservoir downstream of the second region for storing a liquid containing the amplified nucleic acid.

 本開示の態様4に係る流路基板は、態様1から3の何れかにおいて、前記第1試薬は、複数の第1付着物として、前記第1領域に配置されている。
本開示の態様5に係る流路基板は、態様4において、前記第1付着物の表面粗さは、前記流路の表面粗さと比較して、大きい。
A flow path substrate according to a fourth aspect of the present disclosure is any one of the first to third aspects, wherein the first reagent is disposed in the first region as a plurality of first attachment objects.
A flow path substrate according to a fifth aspect of the present disclosure is similar to the fourth aspect, in that the surface roughness of the first attachment is greater than the surface roughness of the flow path.

 本開示の態様6に係る流路基板は、態様4または5において、前記複数の第1付着物は、皮膜として配置されている。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 6 of the present disclosure is the same as in aspect 4 or 5, in which the first attachments are arranged as a coating.

 本開示の態様7に係る流路基板は、態様4から6の何れか1項において、前記複数の第1付着物は、一方向に並んでいる。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 7 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 4 to 6, in which the multiple first attachments are aligned in one direction.

 本開示の態様8に係る流路基板は、態様4から7の何れかにおいて、前記複数の第1付着物は、前記流路の内壁に接触しないように、前記流路の底部に配置されている。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 8 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 4 to 7, in which the first attachments are disposed at the bottom of the flow path so as not to contact the inner wall of the flow path.

 本開示の態様9に係る流路基板は、態様1から8の何れかにおいて、前記第2試薬は、複数の第2付着物として、前記第2領域に配置されている。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 9 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 1 to 8, in which the second reagent is disposed in the second region as a plurality of second attachments.

 本開示の態様10に係る流路基板は、態様9において、前記第2付着物の表面粗さは、前記流路の表面粗さと比較して、大きい。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 10 of the present disclosure is the same as aspect 9, in that the surface roughness of the second attachment is greater than the surface roughness of the flow path.

 本開示の態様11に係る流路基板は、態様9または10において、前記第2付着物は、皮膜として配置されている。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 11 of the present disclosure is the same as that of aspect 9 or 10, in which the second attachment is arranged as a coating.

 本開示の態様12に係る流路基板は、態様9から11の何れか1つにおいて、前記複数の第2付着物は、一方向に並んでいる。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 12 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 9 to 11, in which the multiple second attachments are aligned in one direction.

 本開示の態様13に係る流路基板は、態様9から12の何れかにおいて、前記複数の第2付着物は、前記流路の内壁に接触しないように、前記流路の底部に配置されている。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 13 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 9 to 12, in which the second attachments are disposed at the bottom of the flow path so as not to contact the inner wall of the flow path.

 本開示の態様14に係る流路基板は、態様4から8の何れかにおいて、前記第2試薬は、複数の第2付着物として、前記第2領域に配置されており、前記第2付着物は、前記第1付着物よりも大きい。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 14 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 4 to 8, in which the second reagent is disposed in the second region as a plurality of second attachments, and the second attachments are larger than the first attachments.

 本開示の態様15に係る流路基板は、態様9において、前記第1試薬は、複数の第1付着物として、前記第1領域に配置されており、前記第2付着物の表面粗さは、前記第1付着物の表面粗さと比較して、小さい、請求項9に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 15 of the present disclosure is the flow path substrate according to claim 9, in which the first reagent is disposed in the first region as a plurality of first attachments, and the surface roughness of the second attachments is smaller than the surface roughness of the first attachments.

 本開示の態様16に係る流路基板は、態様1から13の何れかにおいて、前記流路には、増幅された核酸と特異的に結合する標識物質がさらに配置されている。 The flow channel substrate according to aspect 16 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 1 to 13, in which a labeling substance that specifically binds to the amplified nucleic acid is further disposed in the flow channel.

 本開示の態様17に係る流路基板は、態様16において、前記標識物質は、前記第1領域の下流に配置されている。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 17 of the present disclosure is the same as in aspect 16, in which the labeled substance is disposed downstream of the first region.

 本開示の態様18に係る流路基板は、態様16または17において、前記第2試薬は、前記標識物質を含む。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 18 of the present disclosure is the same as that of aspect 16 or 17, in which the second reagent includes the labeling substance.

 本開示の態様19に係る流路基板は、態様16から18の何れかにおいて、前記標識物質は、モレキュラービーコンである。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 19 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 16 to 18, in which the labeling substance is a molecular beacon.

 本開示の態様20に係るカートリッジは、態様1から19の何れかに記載の流路基板と、液体を収容可能な容器と、を備える。 The cartridge according to aspect 20 of the present disclosure comprises a flow path substrate according to any one of aspects 1 to 19 and a container capable of holding a liquid.

 本開示の態様21に係る検出システムは、態様20に記載のカートリッジと、前記流路内で増幅された核酸を検出する検出装置と、を備える。 The detection system according to aspect 21 of the present disclosure includes the cartridge according to aspect 20 and a detection device that detects the nucleic acid amplified in the flow path.

 本開示の態様22に係る流路基板の製造方法は、基板に対して、液体を受け入れる受液部、および、前記受液部に接続する流路を形成する形成工程と、前記流路に、プライマーを含む第1試薬を配置する第1配置工程と、前記流路の前記第1試薬を配置した位置と異なる位置に、核酸の増幅を行う酵素を含む第2試薬を配置する第2配置工程と、を含む。 The method of manufacturing a flow path substrate according to aspect 22 of the present disclosure includes a forming step of forming a liquid receiving section for receiving a liquid and a flow path connected to the liquid receiving section on a substrate, a first disposing step of disposing a first reagent containing a primer in the flow path, and a second disposing step of disposing a second reagent containing an enzyme for amplifying nucleic acid in a position on the flow path different from the position where the first reagent is disposed.

 本開示の態様23に係る流路基板の製造方法は、態様22において、前記第1配置工程では、前記第1試薬を含む溶液を前記流路に塗布することにより、前記第1試薬を前記流路に配置し、前記第2配置工程では、前記第2試薬を含む溶液を前記流路に塗布することにより、前記第2試薬を前記流路に配置する。 The method of manufacturing a flow path substrate according to aspect 23 of the present disclosure is, in aspect 22, the first placement step is to place the first reagent in the flow path by applying a solution containing the first reagent to the flow path, and the second placement step is to place the second reagent in the flow path by applying a solution containing the second reagent to the flow path.

 本開示の態様24に係る流路基板は、態様1から19の何れかにおいて、前記流路は複数の流路であり、前記複数の流路のそれぞれに接続する複数の貯留部をさらに備え、
 前記複数の流路は、検出対象物を検出する検出試薬である第1検出試薬の少なくとも一部が位置する第1流路と、前記第1検出試薬とは異なる検出対象物を検出する検出試薬である第2検出試薬の少なくとも一部が位置する第2流路と、を有する。
A flow path substrate according to Aspect 24 of the present disclosure is any one of Aspects 1 to 19, wherein the flow path is a plurality of flow paths, and the flow path substrate further includes a plurality of reservoirs connected to each of the plurality of flow paths;
The multiple flow paths include a first flow path in which at least a portion of a first detection reagent, which is a detection reagent that detects a detection target, is located, and a second flow path in which at least a portion of a second detection reagent, which is a detection reagent that detects a detection target different from the first detection reagent, is located.

 本開示の態様25に係る流路基板は、態様1から19の何れかにおいて、前記流路は、検体と、前記検体に含まれる検出対象と反応する標識物質と、を含む混合流体が流れる流路であり、前記流路とは異なる領域に位置し、前記混合流体と比較する標準部をさらに備える。 The flow channel substrate according to aspect 25 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 1 to 19, in which the flow channel is a flow channel through which a mixed fluid containing a specimen and a labeling substance that reacts with the detection target contained in the specimen flows, and further includes a standard portion that is located in a region different from the flow channel and is compared with the mixed fluid.

 本開示の態様26に係る流路基板は、態様1において、前記流路は、液体が流れる複数の流路であって、前記複数の流路に接続する複数の貯留部と、を備え、前記複数の流路は、検出対象物を検出する検出試薬である第1検出試薬の少なくとも一部が位置する第1流路と、前記第1検出試薬とは異なる検出対象物を検出する検出試薬である第2検出試薬の少なくとも一部が位置する第2流路と、を有する。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 26 of the present disclosure is, in aspect 1, a plurality of flow paths through which a liquid flows, and includes a plurality of reservoirs connected to the plurality of flow paths, and the plurality of flow paths include a first flow path in which at least a portion of a first detection reagent, which is a detection reagent for detecting a detection target, is located, and a second flow path in which at least a portion of a second detection reagent, which is a detection reagent for detecting a detection target different from the first detection reagent, is located.

 本開示の態様27に係る流路基板は、態様26において、前記複数の流路は、前記受液部、または、前記受液部に接続した流路から分岐している。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 27 of the present disclosure is the same as in aspect 26, in which the multiple flow paths branch off from the liquid receiving section or a flow path connected to the liquid receiving section.

 本開示の態様28に係る流路基板は、態様27において、前記複数の流路の全ては、1つの前記受液部、または、前記1つの受液部に接続した流路から分岐している。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 28 of the present disclosure is the same as in aspect 27, in which all of the multiple flow paths branch off from one of the liquid receiving sections or from a flow path connected to the one liquid receiving section.

 本開示の態様29に係る流路基板は、態様27または28において、前記検出試薬は、前記複数の流路の分岐位置に対して、前記受液部の反対側に配置されている。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 29 of the present disclosure is the same as that of aspect 27 or 28, in which the detection reagent is disposed on the opposite side of the liquid receiving section with respect to the branching position of the multiple flow paths.

 本開示の態様30に係る流路基板は、態様26から29の何れかにおいて、前記検出試薬は、検出対象物に対応する配列を有するプライマーを含む。 In the flow path substrate according to aspect 30 of the present disclosure, in any one of aspects 26 to 29, the detection reagent includes a primer having a sequence corresponding to the detection target.

 本開示の態様31に係る流路基板は、態様30において、前記第2検出試薬は、前記第1検出試薬と配列の異なる前記プライマーを含む。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 31 of the present disclosure is the same as in aspect 30, in which the second detection reagent includes the primer having a different sequence from the first detection reagent.

 本開示の態様32に係る流路基板は、態様26から31の何れかにおいて、前記複数の流路には、同一の試薬が配置されている。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 32 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 26 to 31, in which the same reagent is arranged in the multiple flow paths.

 本開示の態様33に係る流路基板は、態様32において、前記同一の試薬は、核酸の増幅を行う酵素を含む。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 33 of the present disclosure is the same as that of aspect 32, in which the same reagent includes an enzyme that amplifies nucleic acid.

 本開示の態様34に係る流路基板は、態様32または33において、液体を受け入れる受液部をさらに備え、前記同一の試薬は、前記検出試薬が配置された流路において、前記受液部と反対側に位置している。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 34 of the present disclosure is in aspect 32 or 33, and further includes a liquid receiving section for receiving liquid, and the same reagent is located on the opposite side of the flow path in which the detection reagent is disposed from the liquid receiving section.

 本開示の態様35に係る流路基板は、態様26から34の何れかにおいて、前記複数の流路のそれぞれにおいて、液体の送液方向に沿った前記検出試薬の、前記貯留部とは反対側の端から前記貯留部側の端までの前記複数の流路の長さは、互いに略同一である。 In the flow path substrate according to aspect 35 of the present disclosure, in any of aspects 26 to 34, the lengths of the flow paths from the end of the detection reagent opposite the storage portion to the end of the storage portion along the liquid transport direction are approximately the same for each of the multiple flow paths.

 本開示の態様36に係る流路基板は、態様26から35の何れかにおいて、流路幅が他の部分と比較して狭い部分であるフィルター部をさらに備え、前記フィルター部は、前記検出試薬の位置の前記貯留部とは反対側に位置している。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 36 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 26 to 35, further comprising a filter section in which the flow path width is narrower than other sections, and the filter section is located on the opposite side of the storage section from the position of the detection reagent.

 本開示の態様37に係る流路基板は、態様36において、前記フィルター部は、前記複数の流路の分岐位置よりも上流に配置されている。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 37 of the present disclosure is the same as in aspect 36, except that the filter section is disposed upstream of the branching position of the multiple flow paths.

 本開示の態様38に係る流路基板は、態様26から36の何れかにおいて、前記複数の貯留部のうちの隣接する2つの貯留部の間の第1距離は、前記2つの貯留部のそれぞれに接続する2つの流路の間の第2距離よりも大きい。 In the flow path substrate according to aspect 38 of the present disclosure, in any of aspects 26 to 36, the first distance between two adjacent storage sections among the plurality of storage sections is greater than the second distance between the two flow paths connected to each of the two storage sections.

 本開示の態様39に係る流路基板は、態様26から38の何れかにおいて、前記複数の流路のそれぞれは、前記検出試薬の下流において複数の屈曲領域を有する。 The flow path substrate according to aspect 39 of the present disclosure is any one of aspects 26 to 38, in which each of the multiple flow paths has multiple bending regions downstream of the detection reagent.

 <他の実施形態について>
 従来の流路基板は、流体の制御に改善の余地があった。本開示によれば、流路基板における流体の制御を向上させることができる。
<Other embodiments>
Conventional flow path substrates have room for improvement in terms of fluid control. According to the present disclosure, it is possible to improve the control of fluid in a flow path substrate.

 以下、図面を参照して本開示に係る他の実施形態を説明する。本明細書において、特記しない限り、数値範囲を表す「A~B」は、「A以上B以下」を意図する。本明細書において、特記しない限り、「A/B」は、「AをBで割った値」を意図する。本明細書において、「流体」は、液体のみならず、固体を含む液体及び気体などを含むものとする。説明の便宜上、図15、図16、図17、図18、図19、及び図20において、Y軸の正の方向を上方向、Y軸の負の方向を下方向、X軸の正の方向を右方向、X軸の負の方向を左方向として説明する。 Other embodiments of the present disclosure will be described below with reference to the drawings. In this specification, unless otherwise specified, "A to B" indicating a numerical range means "greater than or equal to A and less than or equal to B." In this specification, unless otherwise specified, "A/B" means "the value obtained by dividing A by B." In this specification, "fluid" includes not only liquids but also liquids containing solids and gases. For ease of explanation, in Figures 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, and 20, the positive direction of the Y axis will be described as the upward direction, the negative direction of the Y axis as the downward direction, the positive direction of the X axis as the rightward direction, and the negative direction of the X axis as the leftward direction.

 <第3実施形態>
 以下、図面を適宜用いて、第3実施形態に係る流路基板1Aについて説明する。流路基板1Aは、検体に含まれる対象物質を検出又は定量するために用いられる基板である。流路基板1Aの内部には、流路10が形成されている。流路基板1Aの内部に検体が導入されると、検体及び試薬は、流路基板1Aの内部で混合される。試薬と混合された検体は、一時的に、検出部13に貯留される。例えば、「貯留」とは、検体が流路10内の流れに対して、ある領域に留まっていることを指すが、これには限られない。
Third Embodiment
Hereinafter, the flow path substrate 1A according to the third embodiment will be described with appropriate reference to the drawings. The flow path substrate 1A is a substrate used for detecting or quantifying a target substance contained in a specimen. A flow path 10 is formed inside the flow path substrate 1A. When a specimen is introduced inside the flow path substrate 1A, the specimen and the reagent are mixed inside the flow path substrate 1A. The specimen mixed with the reagent is temporarily stored in the detection unit 13. For example, "storage" refers to the specimen remaining in a certain area relative to the flow inside the flow path 10, but is not limited to this.

 例えば、検体は、生体由来の物質を含んでよい。例えば、検体は、ヒト、犬、猫、又は牛などの哺乳類動物に由来する物質を含んでよい。例えば、検体は、生体から排出された物質又は生体から摘出された物質を含んでよい。例えば、検体は、尿、血液、汗、唾液、又は鼻汁を含んでよい。例えば、対象物質は、ウイルス、細菌、デオキシリボ核酸(Deoxyribonucleic Acid、DNA)、リボ核酸(Ribonucleic Acid、RNA)、又はたんぱく質であってよい。 For example, the specimen may include a substance derived from a living organism. For example, the specimen may include a substance derived from a mammal, such as a human, a dog, a cat, or a cow. For example, the specimen may include a substance excreted from a living organism or a substance extracted from a living organism. For example, the specimen may include urine, blood, sweat, saliva, or nasal secretions. For example, the target substance may be a virus, a bacterium, deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA), ribonucleic acid (RNA), or a protein.

 例えば、試薬は、対象物質又は対象物質が有する核酸若しくは酵素と反応する基質を含んでよい。例えば、試薬は、対象物質又は対象物質が有する核酸若しくは酵素と反応し、蛍光を発する基質を含んでよい。例えば、試薬は、対象物質又は対象物質が有する核酸を検出対象として設計された、プローブDNA又はプローブRNAなどを含んでよい。例えば、試薬は、対象物質又は対象物質が有する核酸を増幅するための、プライマーDNA又は酵素などを含んでよい。 For example, the reagent may include a substrate that reacts with the target substance or a nucleic acid or enzyme contained in the target substance. For example, the reagent may include a substrate that reacts with the target substance or a nucleic acid or enzyme contained in the target substance and emits fluorescence. For example, the reagent may include a probe DNA or a probe RNA designed to detect the target substance or a nucleic acid contained in the target substance. For example, the reagent may include a primer DNA or an enzyme for amplifying the target substance or a nucleic acid contained in the target substance.

 流路基板1Aの構成を、図14、図15、及び図16を用いて説明する。図14に示す通り、流路基板1Aは直方体状の形状を有している。例えば、流路基板1Aは、その一部に、曲面、球面、凹面、又は凸面などを有していてもよい。例えば、流路基板1Aは、その一部又は全部が、樹脂又は金属などで構成された筐体の内部に位置してもよい。例えば、流路基板1Aは、単一の部材から構成されてもよい。例えば、流路基板1Aは、2以上の部材が組み合わせられることにより構成されてもよい。 The configuration of the flow path substrate 1A will be described with reference to Figures 14, 15, and 16. As shown in Figure 14, the flow path substrate 1A has a rectangular parallelepiped shape. For example, the flow path substrate 1A may have a curved, spherical, concave, or convex surface in part. For example, the flow path substrate 1A may be located in whole or in part inside a housing made of resin, metal, or the like. For example, the flow path substrate 1A may be made of a single member. For example, the flow path substrate 1A may be made by combining two or more members.

 図15に示す通り、流路基板1Aは、その内部に、流路10を有する。流路基板1Aは、導入孔11、試薬溶解部12、検出部13、導出孔14、及び分岐部15Aを有する。導入孔11、試薬溶解部12、検出部13、導出孔14、及び分岐部15Aは、流路10の一部である。導入孔11は、流路基板1Aの内部に検体を導入することができる。試薬溶解部12は、試薬が位置し、試薬を検体に溶解させることができる。検出部13は、試薬と混合された検体を貯留することができる。流路基板1Aは、複数の検出部13を有する。導出孔14は、導入孔11から導入された検体のうち、検出部13が満たされた後に導入された検体を流路基板1Aの外部へ導出することができる。流路基板1Aは、複数の導出孔14を有する。分岐部15Aは、流路10を複数に分岐させている。 As shown in FIG. 15, the flow path substrate 1A has a flow path 10 therein. The flow path substrate 1A has an inlet hole 11, a reagent dissolving section 12, a detection section 13, an outlet hole 14, and a branch section 15A. The inlet hole 11, the reagent dissolving section 12, the detection section 13, the outlet hole 14, and the branch section 15A are part of the flow path 10. The inlet hole 11 can introduce a specimen into the flow path substrate 1A. The reagent dissolving section 12 is where the reagent is located and can dissolve the reagent in the specimen. The detection section 13 can store the specimen mixed with the reagent. The flow path substrate 1A has a plurality of detection sections 13. The outlet hole 14 can discharge the specimen introduced from the inlet hole 11, which is introduced after the detection section 13 is filled, to the outside of the flow path substrate 1A. The flow path substrate 1A has a plurality of outlet holes 14. The branch section 15A branches the flow path 10 into a plurality of paths.

 流路基板1Aを用いて検体に含まれる対象物質を検出する際の概要を説明する。まず、検体は、導入孔11から流路に導入される。流路10内を移動する検体は、分岐部15Aにおいて複数の分岐した流路に配分される。各流路を移動する検体は、試薬溶解部12において試薬が混合される。このように試薬が混合された検体は、検出部13に貯留される。検出部13に貯留された検体を観察することにより、対象物質を検出する。例えば、試薬に対象物質と反応し蛍光を発する基質が含まれていてよい。この場合、検出部13に励起光を照射することで検体を観察してよい。検出部13に励起光を照射することで検体を観察する場合、検体中の基質から発せられる蛍光発光に基づき、対象物質を検出してよい。 The following is an overview of detecting a target substance contained in a sample using the flow path substrate 1A. First, the sample is introduced into the flow path from the introduction hole 11. The sample moving through the flow path 10 is distributed to multiple branched flow paths at the branching section 15A. The sample moving through each flow path is mixed with the reagent in the reagent dissolving section 12. The sample mixed with the reagent in this manner is stored in the detection section 13. The target substance is detected by observing the sample stored in the detection section 13. For example, the reagent may contain a substrate that reacts with the target substance and emits fluorescence. In this case, the sample may be observed by irradiating the detection section 13 with excitation light. When observing the sample by irradiating the detection section 13 with excitation light, the target substance may be detected based on the fluorescence emitted from the substrate in the sample.

 流路基板1Aは、導入孔11及び分岐部15Aの間に位置するフィルター部16を更に有する。流路基板1Aは、フィルター部16を有することで、検体中に含まれる固体又は気泡を分離することができる。その結果、検体中に含まれる固体又は気泡が、検出部13における対象物質の検出を妨げる虞を低減できる。 The flow path substrate 1A further has a filter section 16 located between the introduction hole 11 and the branch section 15A. By having the filter section 16, the flow path substrate 1A can separate solids or air bubbles contained in the specimen. As a result, the risk that solids or air bubbles contained in the specimen will interfere with the detection of the target substance in the detection section 13 can be reduced.

 流路基板1Aは、流路基板1Aの表面である第1面17と、第1面17に対向する第2面18とを有する。例えば、第2面18は、第1面17に対し、流路基板1Aの裏面である。流路10の上面は、流路10が有する面のうち、第1面17側に位置する面である。流路10の底面は、流路10が有する面のうち、第2面18側に位置する面である。流路10の側面は、流路10が有する面のうち、上面及び底面に対し傾斜した面である。 The flow path substrate 1A has a first surface 17, which is the surface of the flow path substrate 1A, and a second surface 18 that faces the first surface 17. For example, the second surface 18 is the back surface of the flow path substrate 1A, opposite the first surface 17. The top surface of the flow path 10 is the surface that is located on the first surface 17 side of the flow path 10. The bottom surface of the flow path 10 is the surface that is located on the second surface 18 side of the flow path 10. The side surface of the flow path 10 is the surface that is inclined with respect to the top surface and bottom surface of the flow path 10.

 例えば、流路基板1Aの材料は、樹脂、ガラス、セラミック、又は金属などであってよい。例えば、流路基板1Aの材料は、環状オレフィンポリマー、環状オレフィンコポリマー、アクリル樹脂、又は無延伸ポリプロピレンなどであってよい。流路基板1Aは、複数の材料から構成されてもよい。例えば、流路基板1Aは、射出成型、樹脂切削、又はフォトリソグラフィなどにより形成されてよい。流路10の第1面17に垂直な断面は、四角形の形状を有している。例えば、流路10の第1面17に垂直な断面は、略円形状、楕円形状、台形状、又は三角形状などの形状を有していてもよい。 For example, the material of the flow path substrate 1A may be resin, glass, ceramic, or metal. For example, the material of the flow path substrate 1A may be cyclic olefin polymer, cyclic olefin copolymer, acrylic resin, or unstretched polypropylene. The flow path substrate 1A may be composed of a plurality of materials. For example, the flow path substrate 1A may be formed by injection molding, resin cutting, photolithography, or the like. The cross section perpendicular to the first surface 17 of the flow path 10 has a rectangular shape. For example, the cross section perpendicular to the first surface 17 of the flow path 10 may have a shape such as an approximately circular shape, an elliptical shape, a trapezoidal shape, or a triangular shape.

 (導入孔11)
 導入孔11は、流路基板1Aの内部に検体を導入することができる。導入孔11は、流路10に、検体を導入することができる。導入孔11は、流路基板1Aの外部及び流路10を接続している。導入孔11は、流路10の一端である。導入孔11は、流路基板1Aの各面のうち、いずれかの面に開口している。導入孔11は、流路基板1Aの第1面17に開口している。
(Introduction hole 11)
The introduction hole 11 can introduce a specimen into the inside of the flow path substrate 1A. The introduction hole 11 can introduce a specimen into the flow path 10. The introduction hole 11 connects the outside of the flow path substrate 1A to the flow path 10. The introduction hole 11 is one end of the flow path 10. The introduction hole 11 opens into one of the faces of the flow path substrate 1A. The introduction hole 11 opens into a first face 17 of the flow path substrate 1A.

 導入孔11の形状は、任意の形状が選択される。例えば、導入孔11の内部に位置する空間は、円錐台状の形状を有する。例えば、導入孔11の内部に位置する空間は、三角錐状、四角錐状、円柱状、又は四角柱状などの形状を有していてもよい。導入孔11は、導入孔11の断面積が、第1面17から、第1第17の対面である第2面18に向けて小さくなる形状を有している。例えば、導入孔11の開口は、略円形状である。例えば、導入孔11の開口は、楕円形状、四角形状、六角形状、又は八角形状などであってよい。 The shape of the introduction hole 11 may be selected from any shape. For example, the space inside the introduction hole 11 has a truncated cone shape. For example, the space inside the introduction hole 11 may have a triangular pyramid shape, a square pyramid shape, a cylindrical shape, a square prism shape, or the like. The introduction hole 11 has a shape in which the cross-sectional area of the introduction hole 11 decreases from the first surface 17 toward the second surface 18, which is opposite the first surface 17. For example, the opening of the introduction hole 11 is approximately circular. For example, the opening of the introduction hole 11 may be elliptical, rectangular, hexagonal, or octagonal.

 (試薬溶解部12)
 試薬溶解部12は、試薬を検体に溶解させることができる。試薬溶解部12は、流路を流れる検体に、試薬を溶解させることができる。試薬溶解部12は、流路の底面上に、試薬が位置する。試薬溶解部12は、流路の側面上に、試薬が位置してもよい。試薬溶解部12は、分岐部15Aの流路D155に対して、流路C154とは反対側に連通している。
(Reagent dissolving section 12)
The reagent dissolving section 12 can dissolve the reagent in the specimen. The reagent dissolving section 12 can dissolve the reagent in the specimen flowing through the flow path. In the reagent dissolving section 12, the reagent is located on the bottom surface of the flow path. In the reagent dissolving section 12, the reagent may be located on the side surface of the flow path. The reagent dissolving section 12 communicates with the flow path D155 of the branching section 15A on the side opposite to the flow path C154.

 試薬溶解部12の形状は、任意の形状が選択される。例えば、試薬溶解部12は、直線状の形状又は屈曲した形状を有している。試薬溶解部12は、屈曲した形状として、円弧状又はL字状の形状を有していてよい。例えば、本実施形態の試薬溶解部12は、円弧状の形状及び直線の形状が、交互に繰り返される形状を有している。試薬溶解部12において検体に試薬を溶解させるためには、試薬溶解部12は、屈曲した形状を有していなくてもよい。例えば、試薬溶解部12の流路の幅は、一定である。例えば、試薬溶解部12の流路の幅は、変化してもよい。例えば、試薬溶解部12の流路の幅は、一部のみが広くなっていてもよい。 The shape of the reagent dissolving section 12 may be selected arbitrarily. For example, the reagent dissolving section 12 has a straight or curved shape. The curved shape of the reagent dissolving section 12 may be an arc or L-shape. For example, the reagent dissolving section 12 of this embodiment has a shape in which arc shapes and straight shapes are repeated alternately. In order to dissolve the reagent in the sample in the reagent dissolving section 12, the reagent dissolving section 12 does not have to have a curved shape. For example, the width of the flow path of the reagent dissolving section 12 is constant. For example, the width of the flow path of the reagent dissolving section 12 may change. For example, the width of the flow path of the reagent dissolving section 12 may be wider only in a portion.

 (検出部13)
 検出部13は、検体を貯留することができる。検出部13は、試薬と混合された検体を貯留することができる。例えば、流路基板1Aを用いて対象物質を光で検出する場合、検出部13の第1面17側の面及び第2面18側の面は、透光性を有していてもよい。検出部13は、分岐部15Aの流路D155に対して、流路C154とは反対側に連通している。
(Detection Unit 13)
The detection unit 13 can store a specimen. The detection unit 13 can store a specimen mixed with a reagent. For example, when a target substance is detected by light using the flow path substrate 1A, the surface on the first surface 17 side and the surface on the second surface 18 side of the detection unit 13 may be translucent. The detection unit 13 communicates with the flow path D155 of the branching unit 15A on the side opposite to the flow path C154.

 (導出孔14)
 導出孔14は、流路基板1Aの内部から、流路基板1Aの外部へ、検体を導出することができる。導出孔14は、流路10から、流路基板1Aの外部へ、検体を導出することができる。導出孔14は、流路基板1Aが有する流路の一端である。導出孔14は、流路基板1Aの各面のうち、いずれかの面に開口している。導出孔14は、流路基板1Aの第1面17に開口している。
(Outlet hole 14)
The outlet hole 14 can lead the analyte from inside the flow path substrate 1A to the outside of the flow path substrate 1A. The outlet hole 14 can lead the analyte from the flow path 10 to the outside of the flow path substrate 1A. The outlet hole 14 is one end of the flow path of the flow path substrate 1A. The outlet hole 14 opens to one of the faces of the flow path substrate 1A. The outlet hole 14 opens to a first face 17 of the flow path substrate 1A.

 導出孔14の形状は、任意の形状が選択される。例えば、導出孔14の内部に位置する空間は、円錐台状の形状を有する。例えば、導出孔14の内部に位置する空間は、三角錐状、四角錐状、円柱状、又は四角柱状などの形状を有していてもよい。導出孔14は、導出孔14の断面積が、第1面17から、第1第17の対面である第2面18に向けて小さくなる形状を有している。導出孔14の開口は、略円形状の形状である。例えば、導出孔14の開口は、四角形状、六角形状、又は八角形状などであってよい。 The shape of the outlet hole 14 may be selected arbitrarily. For example, the space inside the outlet hole 14 has a truncated cone shape. For example, the space inside the outlet hole 14 may have a triangular pyramid shape, a square pyramid shape, a cylindrical shape, a square prism shape, or the like. The outlet hole 14 has a shape in which the cross-sectional area of the outlet hole 14 decreases from the first surface 17 toward the second surface 18, which is opposite the first surface 17. The opening of the outlet hole 14 is approximately circular in shape. For example, the opening of the outlet hole 14 may be a square shape, a hexagon shape, an octagon shape, or the like.

 (分岐部15A)
 分岐部15Aは、流路基板1Aの流路を複数に分岐させている。例えば、分岐部15Aは、流路基板1Aの流路を4本に分岐させている。分岐させる本数はこれに限定されず、任意の本数に設定することができる。分岐部15Aは、流路基板1Aの流路を左右に分岐させている。「流路を左右に分岐」とは、分岐部15Aから延びている流路が、上下に延びている第一の流路と、第一の流路に対し右側に延びている第二の流路と、第一の流路に対し左側に延びている第三の流路と、を有することを指すが、これには限られない。例えば、「流路を左右に分岐」には、分岐部15Aから延びている流路が、左右に延びている第一の流路と、第一の流路に対し上側に延びている第二の流路と、第一の流路に対し下側に延びている第三の流路と、を有する場合も含む。
(Branch portion 15A)
The branching section 15A branches the flow path of the flow path substrate 1A into a plurality of paths. For example, the branching section 15A branches the flow path of the flow path substrate 1A into four paths. The number of paths to be branched is not limited to this, and can be set to any number. The branching section 15A branches the flow path of the flow path substrate 1A to the left and right. "Branching the flow path to the left and right" refers to the flow path extending from the branching section 15A having a first flow path extending up and down, a second flow path extending to the right of the first flow path, and a third flow path extending to the left of the first flow path, but is not limited thereto. For example, "branching the flow path to the left and right" also includes the case where the flow path extending from the branching section 15A has a first flow path extending to the left and right, a second flow path extending above the first flow path, and a third flow path extending below the first flow path.

 分岐部15Aは、導入孔11及び検出部13の間に位置すればよい。本実施形態の分岐部15Aは、導入孔11及び試薬溶解部12の間に位置する。例えば、分岐部15Aは、試薬溶解部12及び検出部13の間に位置してもよい。流路基板1Aは、分岐部15Aを有することで、流路10内で、同一の検体を複数に配分することができる。よって、複数条件下での対象物質の検出を、簡便に行うことができる。 The branching section 15A may be located between the introduction hole 11 and the detection section 13. In this embodiment, the branching section 15A is located between the introduction hole 11 and the reagent dissolving section 12. For example, the branching section 15A may be located between the reagent dissolving section 12 and the detection section 13. By having the branching section 15A, the flow path substrate 1A can distribute the same sample to multiple locations within the flow path 10. This makes it possible to easily detect a target substance under multiple conditions.

 図16に示す通り、分岐部15Aは、流路A151、流路B152、及び第1分岐壁153を有する。分岐部15Aは、複数の流路B152を有する。本実施形態の分岐部15Aは、2本の流路B152を有する。分岐部15Aが有する流路B152の本数はこれに限定されず、任意の本数に設定することができる。 As shown in FIG. 16, the branching portion 15A has a flow path A151, a flow path B152, and a first branching wall 153. The branching portion 15A has a plurality of flow paths B152. In this embodiment, the branching portion 15A has two flow paths B152. The number of flow paths B152 that the branching portion 15A has is not limited to this, and can be set to any number.

 分岐部15Aにおいて、複数の流路B152は、それぞれの太さが、流路A151の太さよりも細い。例えば、流路B152の太さに対する流路A151の太さの割合(流路B152の太さ/流路A151の太さ)は、0.800以下であってよい。流路B152の太さが流路A151の太さよりも細ければ、流路A151の幅並びに深さ、及び流路B152の幅並びに深さは、どのような値に設定されてよい。例えば、流路A151の幅は、200μm~1000μmであってよい。例えば、流路A151の深さは、25μm~200μmであってよい。例えば、流路B152の幅は、20.0μm~500μmであってよい。例えば、流路B152の深さは、25.0μm~200μmであってよい。 In the branching portion 15A, the width of each of the multiple flow paths B152 is narrower than the width of flow path A151. For example, the ratio of the width of flow path A151 to the width of flow path B152 (width of flow path B152/width of flow path A151) may be 0.800 or less. As long as the width of flow path B152 is narrower than the width of flow path A151, the width and depth of flow path A151 and the width and depth of flow path B152 may be set to any value. For example, the width of flow path A151 may be 200 μm to 1000 μm. For example, the depth of flow path A151 may be 25 μm to 200 μm. For example, the width of flow path B152 may be 20.0 μm to 500 μm. For example, the depth of flow path B152 may be 25.0 μm to 200 μm.

 流路A151は、受液部41に接続した流路である。流路A151は、導入孔11から導入された検体を通すことができる。流路A151は、フィルター部16と接続されている。流路A151は、フィルター部16から流出した検体を通すことができる。流路A151の幅は一定である。流路A151の幅は、変化してよい。ここで、本明細書において、「太さ」とは、流路の延伸方向に垂直な断面積をいう。「流路の延伸方向」とは、流路により形成された空間が連続して位置する方向をいう。例えば、「流路の延伸方向」とは、流路に流体を流した時の、流体が流れる方向をいうが、これには限らない。 The flow path A151 is a flow path connected to the liquid receiving section 41. The flow path A151 can pass a specimen introduced from the introduction hole 11. The flow path A151 is connected to the filter section 16. The flow path A151 can pass a specimen that has flowed out from the filter section 16. The width of the flow path A151 is constant. The width of the flow path A151 may vary. Here, in this specification, "thickness" refers to the cross-sectional area perpendicular to the extension direction of the flow path. The "extension direction of the flow path" refers to the direction in which the spaces formed by the flow paths are continuously located. For example, the "extension direction of the flow path" refers to the direction in which the fluid flows when the fluid is made to flow in the flow path, but is not limited to this.

 複数の流路B152は、複数の流路の流路である。流路B152は、流路A151から分岐した流路である。流路B152は、流路A151から流出した検体を通すことができる。流路B152は、流路A151から流出した検体の一部を通すことができる。流路B152の幅は一定である。流路B152の幅は、変化してよい。 The multiple flow paths B152 are flow paths of the multiple flow paths. The flow path B152 is a flow path branched off from the flow path A151. The flow path B152 can pass the specimen flowing out from the flow path A151. The flow path B152 can pass a part of the specimen flowing out from the flow path A151. The width of the flow path B152 is constant. The width of the flow path B152 may vary.

 複数の流路B152は、流路A151と重なる第1仮想直線と重ならない方向に、流路A151から分岐した流路である。ここで、「流路A151と重なる第1仮想直線」とは、流路A151内に位置する点から、流路A151の延伸方向に延びる直線をいう。複数の流路B152は、流路A151から左右に分岐した流路である。 The multiple flow paths B152 are flow paths branched off from flow path A151 in a direction that does not overlap with a first virtual straight line that overlaps with flow path A151. Here, the "first virtual straight line that overlaps with flow path A151" refers to a straight line that extends from a point located within flow path A151 in the extension direction of flow path A151. The multiple flow paths B152 are flow paths branched off to the left and right from flow path A151.

 複数の流路B152の太さは、それぞれ同じ太さであってもよく、異なる太さであってもよい。複数の流路B152の太さの和は、流路A151の太さよりも小さい。例えば、流路B152の太さの和に対する流路A151の太さの割合(流路B152の太さの和/流路A151の太さ)は、0.900以下であってよい。複数の流路B152の太さの和は、流路C154の太さよりも大きい。例えば、流路B152の太さの和に対する流路C154の太さの割合(流路B152の太さの和/流路A151の太さ)は、1.50以上であってよい。 The thickness of the multiple flow paths B152 may be the same or different. The sum of the thicknesses of the multiple flow paths B152 is smaller than the thickness of flow path A151. For example, the ratio of the thickness of flow path A151 to the sum of the thicknesses of flow paths B152 (sum of the thicknesses of flow paths B152/thickness of flow path A151) may be 0.900 or less. The sum of the thicknesses of the multiple flow paths B152 is larger than the thickness of flow path C154. For example, the ratio of the thickness of flow path C154 to the sum of the thicknesses of flow paths B152 (sum of the thicknesses of flow paths B152/thickness of flow path A151) may be 1.50 or more.

 第1分岐壁153は、複数の流路B152が分岐した領域に位置する。第1分岐壁153は、2本の流路B152の間に位置する。第1分岐壁153は、流路B152と接続されている。本実施形態では、第1分岐壁153は、流路B152が有する側面と連続している。本実施形態において、第1分岐壁153は、流路B152の側面と連続している流路10の側面のうち、流路B152の流入口よりも上流に位置する面である。第1分岐壁153は、流路A151が有する側面と連続していない。 The first branch wall 153 is located in the region where the multiple flow paths B152 branch off. The first branch wall 153 is located between two flow paths B152. The first branch wall 153 is connected to flow path B152. In this embodiment, the first branch wall 153 is continuous with the side surface of flow path B152. In this embodiment, the first branch wall 153 is a surface of the side surface of flow path 10 that is continuous with the side surface of flow path B152 and is located upstream of the inlet of flow path B152. The first branch wall 153 is not continuous with the side surface of flow path A151.

 第1分岐壁153は、流路A151と重なる第1仮想直線と重なっている。本実施形態において、第1分岐壁153の長さは、流路A151の幅よりも大きい。例えば、第1分岐壁153の長さは、流路A151の幅よりも小さくてもよい。第1分岐壁153は、曲面又は平面を有している。本実施形態の第1分岐壁153は、平面及び曲面を有する。本実施形態の第1分岐壁153は2枚の平面の間に位置する曲面を有する。例えば、第1分岐壁153は、2枚の平面のみを有していてもよい。例えば、第1分岐壁153は、1枚の曲面のみを有していてもよい。 The first branch wall 153 overlaps with a first virtual straight line that overlaps with the flow path A151. In this embodiment, the length of the first branch wall 153 is greater than the width of the flow path A151. For example, the length of the first branch wall 153 may be less than the width of the flow path A151. The first branch wall 153 has a curved surface or a flat surface. The first branch wall 153 in this embodiment has a flat surface and a curved surface. The first branch wall 153 in this embodiment has a curved surface located between two flat surfaces. For example, the first branch wall 153 may have only two flat surfaces. For example, the first branch wall 153 may have only one curved surface.

 分岐部15Aは、流路C154を更に有する。分岐部15Aは、複数の流路C154を有する。本実施形態において、分岐部15Aは、2本の流路C154を有する。分岐部15Aは、複数の流路B152と同じ本数の流路C154を有する。分岐部15Aが有する流路C154の本数と、分岐部15Aが有する流路B152の本数と、は異なっていてもよい。 The branching portion 15A further has a flow path C154. The branching portion 15A has a plurality of flow paths C154. In this embodiment, the branching portion 15A has two flow paths C154. The branching portion 15A has the same number of flow paths C154 as the plurality of flow paths B152. The number of flow paths C154 that the branching portion 15A has may be different from the number of flow paths B152 that the branching portion 15A has.

 流路C154は、流路B152と接続されている。複数の流路C154のそれぞれは、複数の流路B152のそれぞれと接続されている。複数の流路C154のそれぞれは、複数の流路B152の一部のみと接続されていてもよい。流路C154は、流路B152から延びる流路である。流路C154は、流路B152から流出した検体を通すことができる。複数の流路C154のそれぞれは、複数の流路B152のそれぞれから流出した検体を通すことができる。 Flow path C154 is connected to flow path B152. Each of the multiple flow paths C154 is connected to each of the multiple flow paths B152. Each of the multiple flow paths C154 may be connected to only a portion of the multiple flow paths B152. Flow path C154 is a flow path extending from flow path B152. Flow path C154 can pass a sample that has flowed out from flow path B152. Each of the multiple flow paths C154 can pass a sample that has flowed out from each of the multiple flow paths B152.

 流路C154の太さは、流路A151の太さよりも、太くてもよく、細くてもよい。本実施形態の流路C154の太さは、流路A151の太さよりも細い。本実施形態において、複数の流路C154のそれぞれの太さは、流路A151の太さよりも細い。例えば、流路C154の太さに対する流路A151の太さの割合(流路C154の太さ/流路A151の太さ)は、0.600以下であってよい。本実施形態において、複数の流路C154の太さの和は、流路A151の太さよりも小さい。例えば、流路C154の太さの和に対する流路A151の太さの割合(流路C154の太さの和/流路A151の太さ)は、0.950以下であってよい。 The thickness of flow path C154 may be thicker or thinner than that of flow path A151. In this embodiment, the thickness of flow path C154 is thinner than that of flow path A151. In this embodiment, the thickness of each of the multiple flow paths C154 is thinner than that of flow path A151. For example, the ratio of the thickness of flow path A151 to the thickness of flow path C154 (thickness of flow path C154/thickness of flow path A151) may be 0.600 or less. In this embodiment, the sum of the thicknesses of the multiple flow paths C154 is smaller than the thickness of flow path A151. For example, the ratio of the thickness of flow path A151 to the sum of the thicknesses of flow paths C154 (sum of the thicknesses of flow paths C154/thickness of flow path A151) may be 0.950 or less.

 流路C154の太さは、流路B152の太さよりも、太くてもよく、細くてもよい。本実施形態の流路C154の太さは、流路B152の太さよりも太い。本実施形態において、複数の流路C154のそれぞれの太さは、複数の流路B152のそれぞれの太さよりも太い。例えば、流路C154の太さに対する流路B152の太さの割合(流路C154の太さ/流路B152の太さ)は、1.05以上であってよい。 The thickness of flow path C154 may be thicker or thinner than the thickness of flow path B152. In this embodiment, the thickness of flow path C154 is thicker than the thickness of flow path B152. In this embodiment, the thickness of each of the multiple flow paths C154 is thicker than the thickness of each of the multiple flow paths B152. For example, the ratio of the thickness of flow path B152 to the thickness of flow path C154 (thickness of flow path C154/thickness of flow path B152) may be 1.05 or more.

 例えば、流路C154の幅は、20.0μm~500μmであってよい。例えば、流路C154の深さは、25.0μm~200μmであってよい。本実施形態の流路C154の幅は一定である。流路C154の太さは、変化してもよい。複数の流路C154の太さは、それぞれ同じ太さであってもよく、異なる太さであってもよい。本実施形態において、複数の流路C154の太さは、それぞれ同じ太さである。 For example, the width of the flow path C154 may be 20.0 μm to 500 μm. For example, the depth of the flow path C154 may be 25.0 μm to 200 μm. In this embodiment, the width of the flow path C154 is constant. The thickness of the flow path C154 may vary. The thickness of the multiple flow paths C154 may be the same or different. In this embodiment, the thickness of the multiple flow paths C154 is the same.

 分岐部15Aは、流路D155を更に有する。流路D155は、流路C154から分岐した流路である。流路D155は、流路C154から流出した検体を通すことができる。流路D155は、流路C154から流出した検体の一部を通すことができる。 The branching portion 15A further includes a flow path D155. The flow path D155 is a flow path branched off from the flow path C154. The flow path D155 can pass the specimen flowing out from the flow path C154. The flow path D155 can pass a portion of the specimen flowing out from the flow path C154.

 分岐部15Aは、複数の流路D155を有する。本実施形態において、分岐部15Aは、4本の流路D155を有する。分岐部15Aが有する流路D155の本数はこれに限定されず、任意の本数に設定することができる。複数の流路D155は、流路C154から分岐した流路である。複数の流路D155は、流路C154と重なる第2仮想直線と重ならない方向に、流路C154から分岐した流路である。ここで、「流路C154と重なる第2仮想直線」とは、流路C154内に位置する点から、流路C154の延伸方向に延びる直線をいう。複数の流路D155は、流路C154から左右に分岐した流路である。 The branching section 15A has a plurality of flow paths D155. In this embodiment, the branching section 15A has four flow paths D155. The number of flow paths D155 in the branching section 15A is not limited to this and can be set to any number. The plurality of flow paths D155 are flow paths branched off from the flow path C154. The plurality of flow paths D155 are flow paths branched off from the flow path C154 in a direction that does not overlap with a second imaginary line that overlaps with the flow path C154. Here, the "second imaginary line that overlaps with the flow path C154" refers to a line that extends from a point located within the flow path C154 in the extension direction of the flow path C154. The plurality of flow paths D155 are flow paths branched off to the left and right from the flow path C154.

 流路D155の太さは、流路A151の太さよりも、太くてもよく、細くてもよい。本実施形態の流路D155の太さは、流路A151の太さよりも細い。本実施形態の複数の流路D155のそれぞれの太さは、流路A151の太さよりも細い。例えば、流路D155の太さに対する流路A151の太さの割合(流路D155の太さ/流路A151の太さ)は、0.800以下であってよい。 The width of flow path D155 may be thicker or thinner than the width of flow path A151. In this embodiment, the width of flow path D155 is thinner than the width of flow path A151. In this embodiment, the width of each of the multiple flow paths D155 is thinner than the width of flow path A151. For example, the ratio of the width of flow path A151 to the width of flow path D155 (width of flow path D155/width of flow path A151) may be 0.800 or less.

 流路D155の太さは、流路B152の太さよりも、太くてもよく、細くてもよい。本実施形態の流路D155の太さは、流路B152の太さよりも細い。本実施形態の複数の流路D155のそれぞれの太さは、複数の流路B152のそれぞれの太さよりも細い。例えば、流路D155の太さに対する流路A151の太さの割合(流路D155の太さ/流路A151の太さ)は、0.980以下であってよい。例えば、流路D155の太さは、流路B152と同じであってもよい。 The width of flow path D155 may be thicker or thinner than that of flow path B152. In this embodiment, the width of flow path D155 is thinner than that of flow path B152. In this embodiment, the width of each of the multiple flow paths D155 is thinner than that of each of the multiple flow paths B152. For example, the ratio of the width of flow path A151 to the width of flow path D155 (width of flow path D155/width of flow path A151) may be 0.980 or less. For example, the width of flow path D155 may be the same as that of flow path B152.

 流路D155の太さは、流路C154の太さよりも、太くてもよく、細くてもよい。本実施形態の流路D155の太さは、流路C154の太さよりも細い。本実施形態の複数の流路D155のそれぞれの太さは、流路C154の太さよりも細い。例えば、流路D155の太さに対する流路C154の太さの割合(流路D155の太さ/流路C154の太さ)は、0.950以下であってよい。 The width of flow path D155 may be thicker or thinner than the width of flow path C154. In this embodiment, the width of flow path D155 is thinner than the width of flow path C154. In this embodiment, the width of each of the multiple flow paths D155 is thinner than the width of flow path C154. For example, the ratio of the width of flow path C154 to the width of flow path D155 (width of flow path D155/width of flow path C154) may be 0.950 or less.

 例えば、流路D155の幅は、20.0μm~500μmであってよい。例えば、流路D155の深さは、25.0μm~200μmであってよい。本実施形態の流路D155の幅は、一定である。流路D155の幅は、変化してもよい。複数の流路D155の太さは、それぞれ同じ太さであってもよく、異なる太さであってもよい。本実施形態において、複数の流路D155の太さは、それぞれ同じ太さである。 For example, the width of the flow path D155 may be 20.0 μm to 500 μm. For example, the depth of the flow path D155 may be 25.0 μm to 200 μm. In this embodiment, the width of the flow path D155 is constant. The width of the flow path D155 may vary. The thickness of the multiple flow paths D155 may be the same or different. In this embodiment, the thickness of the multiple flow paths D155 is the same.

 分岐部15Aにおいて、複数の流路B152の長さ及び複数の流路C154の長さの和は、流路A151の長さの和よりも小さい。分岐部15Aにおいて、複数の流路B152の長さ及び複数の流路C154の長さの和は、複数の流路D155の長さ及び試薬溶解部12の長さの和よりも小さい。 In the branching section 15A, the sum of the lengths of the multiple flow paths B152 and the multiple flow paths C154 is smaller than the sum of the lengths of the flow paths A151. In the branching section 15A, the sum of the lengths of the multiple flow paths B152 and the multiple flow paths C154 is smaller than the sum of the lengths of the multiple flow paths D155 and the reagent dissolving section 12.

 本実施形態の分岐部15Aにおいて、2本の流路B152が成す角の角度を第1角度とする。第1角度は、例えば、90.0度以上であってよい。本実施形態の分岐部15Aにおいて、4本の流路D155のうち、隣り合った流路D155が成す角のそれぞれの角度を第2角度及び第3角度とする。第2角度及び第3角度は、例えば、90.0度以下であってよい。例えば、第1角度は、第2角度及び第3角度よりも大きい。例えば、第2角度及び第3角度の和は、第1角度よりも大きい。第2角度及び第3角度は、同じ角度であってもよく、異なる角度であってもよい。 In the branching section 15A of this embodiment, the angle formed by the two flow paths B152 is defined as the first angle. The first angle may be, for example, 90.0 degrees or more. In the branching section 15A of this embodiment, the angles formed by adjacent flow paths D155 among the four flow paths D155 are defined as the second angle and the third angle. The second angle and the third angle may be, for example, 90.0 degrees or less. For example, the first angle is greater than the second angle and the third angle. For example, the sum of the second angle and the third angle is greater than the first angle. The second angle and the third angle may be the same angle or may be different angles.

 (フィルター部16)
 フィルター部16は、検体中に含まれる固体又は気泡を分離することができる。フィルター部16は、導入孔11及び分岐部15Aの間に位置する。例えば、フィルター部16は、分岐部15A及び試薬溶解部12の間に位置してもよい。例えば、フィルター部16は、流路10のうち、最も太い領域を有する。
(Filter section 16)
The filter section 16 can separate solids or air bubbles contained in the sample. The filter section 16 is located between the introduction hole 11 and the branching section 15A. For example, the filter section 16 may be located between the branching section 15A and the reagent dissolving section 12. For example, the filter section 16 has the thickest region in the flow channel 10.

 (分岐部15Aにおける検体の流れ)
 以下、分岐部15Aにおける検体の流れについて説明する。流路基板1Aにおいて、複数の流路B152は、第1仮想直線と重ならない方向に流路A151から分岐している。よって、流路A151から流出した検体の大部分が、直接的に、流路B152に流入する虞は低い。また、流路基板1Aにおいて、第1分岐壁153は、第1仮想直線と重なっている。よって、流路A151から流出した検体の大部分は、第1分岐壁153に衝突した後に、複数の流路B152のそれぞれに流入する。その結果、第1分岐壁が、第1仮想直線と重なっていない場合、及び、第1分岐壁を有していない場合と比較して、複数の流路B152のいずれかにのみ検体が流れてしまう虞を低減できる。
(Flow of sample at branching portion 15A)
The flow of the specimen in the branching section 15A will be described below. In the flow path substrate 1A, the multiple flow paths B152 branch off from the flow path A151 in a direction that does not overlap with the first virtual straight line. Therefore, the risk that most of the specimen flowing out of the flow path A151 will directly flow into the flow path B152 is low. In addition, in the flow path substrate 1A, the first branching wall 153 overlaps with the first virtual straight line. Therefore, most of the specimen flowing out of the flow path A151 will collide with the first branching wall 153 and then flow into each of the multiple flow paths B152. As a result, compared to when the first branching wall does not overlap with the first virtual straight line and when there is no first branching wall, the risk that the specimen will flow only into one of the multiple flow paths B152 can be reduced.

 また、流路基板1Aにおいて、複数の流路B152のそれぞれの太さは、流路A151の太さよりも細い。よって、流路A151から流出した検体がいずれかの流路B152に流入する際に抵抗が生まれる。その結果、複数の流路Bのそれぞれの太さが流路Aの太さよりも太い場合と比較して、複数の流路B152のいずれかにのみ検体が流れてしまう虞を低減できる。 Furthermore, in the flow path substrate 1A, the width of each of the multiple flow paths B152 is narrower than the width of flow path A151. Therefore, resistance is generated when the sample flowing out of flow path A151 flows into any of the flow paths B152. As a result, the risk of the sample flowing into only one of the multiple flow paths B152 can be reduced compared to when the width of each of the multiple flow paths B is wider than the width of flow path A.

 本実施形態の流路基板1Aにおいて、複数の流路B152は、第1仮想直線と重ならない方向に流路A151から分岐している。また、本実施形態の流路基板1Aにおいて、第1分岐壁153は、第1仮想直線と重なっている。また、本実施形態の流路基板1Aにおいて、複数の流路B152のそれぞれの太さは、流路A151の太さよりも細い。その結果、複数の流路B152のいずれかに検体が流れずに、その他の流路B152にのみ検体が流れてしまう虞を低減できる。 In the flow path substrate 1A of this embodiment, the multiple flow paths B152 branch off from the flow path A151 in a direction that does not overlap with the first virtual straight line. Also, in the flow path substrate 1A of this embodiment, the first branch wall 153 overlaps with the first virtual straight line. Also, in the flow path substrate 1A of this embodiment, the width of each of the multiple flow paths B152 is thinner than the width of the flow path A151. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk that the sample will not flow in any of the multiple flow paths B152, and will flow only in the other flow paths B152.

 <第4実施形態>
 以下、第4実施形態に係る流路基板2Aについて説明する。流路基板2Aは、流路基板1Aと比較して、分岐部25Aの構成が異なる。図17に示す通り、複数の流路B252のぞれぞれの太さは異なる。2本の流路B252のうち、一方の太さは、他方の太さよりも細い。複数の流路D255のぞれぞれの太さは異なる。4本の流路D255のうち、一方の流路B252と接続されている2本の流路D255の太さは、他方の流路B252と接続されている2本の流路D255の太さよりも細い。4本の流路D255のうち、一方の流路B252よりも細い流路B252と接続されている2本の流路D255の太さは、他方の流路B252と接続されている2本の流路D255の太さよりも細い。本実施形態の流路基板2Aにおいても、全ての流路B252に、検体が流入しやすくすることができる。
Fourth Embodiment
The flow path substrate 2A according to the fourth embodiment will be described below. The flow path substrate 2A is different from the flow path substrate 1A in the configuration of the branching section 25A. As shown in FIG. 17, the thicknesses of the multiple flow paths B252 are different. Of the two flow paths B252, one is thinner than the other. The thicknesses of the multiple flow paths D255 are different. Of the four flow paths D255, the thicknesses of the two flow paths D255 connected to one flow path B252 are thinner than the thicknesses of the two flow paths D255 connected to the other flow path B252. Of the four flow paths D255, the thicknesses of the two flow paths D255 connected to a flow path B252 thinner than one flow path B252 are thinner than the thicknesses of the two flow paths D255 connected to the other flow path B252. In the flow path substrate 2A of this embodiment, it is also possible to facilitate the flow of the specimen into all the flow paths B252.

 <第5実施形態>
 以下、第5実施形態に係る流路基板3Aについて説明する。流路基板3Aは、流路基板1Aと比較して、分岐部35Aの構成が異なる。図18に示す通り、分岐部35Aは、流路基板1Aにおける、流路D155及び第2分岐壁157に相当する構成を有していない。分岐部35Aは、4本の流路C354を有する。4本の流路C354のうち、2本の流路C354は、1本の流路B352Aと接続されている。本実施形態の流路基板3Aにおいても、全ての流路B352Aに、検体が流入しやすくすることができる。
Fifth Embodiment
The flow path substrate 3A according to the fifth embodiment will be described below. The flow path substrate 3A is different from the flow path substrate 1A in the configuration of the branching section 35A. As shown in FIG. 18, the branching section 35A does not have a configuration corresponding to the flow path D155 and the second branching wall 157 in the flow path substrate 1A. The branching section 35A has four flow paths C354. Of the four flow paths C354, two flow paths C354 are connected to one flow path B352A. In the flow path substrate 3A of this embodiment, it is also possible to facilitate the flow of the specimen into all of the flow paths B352A.

 <第6実施形態>
 以下、第6実施形態に係る流路基板4Aについて説明する。流路基板4Aは、流路基板1Aと比較して、分岐部45Eの構成が異なる。図19に示す通り、分岐部45Eは、流路基板1Aにおける、流路C154に相当する構成を有していない。分岐部45Eは、複数の流路B452Eから分岐した、複数の流路D455Eを有する。分岐部45Eにおいて、流路D455Eは、流路B452Eから分岐している。複数の流路D455Eのそれぞれの太さは、複数の流路B452Eのそれぞれの太さよりも細い。本実施形態の流路基板4Aにおいても、全ての流路B452Eに、検体が流入しやすくすることができる。また、本実施形態の流路基板4Aにおいては、全ての流路D455Eに、検体が流入しやすくすることができる。
Sixth Embodiment
The flow path substrate 4A according to the sixth embodiment will be described below. The flow path substrate 4A is different from the flow path substrate 1A in the configuration of the branching section 45E. As shown in FIG. 19, the branching section 45E does not have a configuration corresponding to the flow path C154 in the flow path substrate 1A. The branching section 45E has a plurality of flow paths D455E branched from a plurality of flow paths B452E. In the branching section 45E, the flow path D455E branches from the flow path B452E. The width of each of the plurality of flow paths D455E is thinner than the width of each of the plurality of flow paths B452E. In the flow path substrate 4A of this embodiment, it is also possible to make it easier for the specimen to flow into all of the flow paths B452E. In addition, in the flow path substrate 4A of this embodiment, it is also possible to make it easier for the specimen to flow into all of the flow paths D455E.

 <第7実施形態>
 以下、第7実施形態に係る流路基板5Aについて説明する。流路基板5Aは、流路基板1Aと比較して、分岐部55Aの構成が異なる。図20に示す通り、分岐部55Aにおいて、複数の流路D555は、一方の流路C554のみから分岐している。2本の流路D555は、一方の流路C554のみから分岐している。複数の流路D555は、一方の流路C554にのみ接続されている。一方の流路C554の長さは、他方の流路C554の長さよりも長い。本実施形態の流路基板5Aにおいても、全ての流路B552に、検体が流入しやすくすることができる。
Seventh Embodiment
The flow path substrate 5A according to the seventh embodiment will be described below. The flow path substrate 5A is different from the flow path substrate 1A in the configuration of the branching section 55A. As shown in FIG. 20, in the branching section 55A, the multiple flow paths D555 are branched from only one flow path C554. The two flow paths D555 are branched from only one flow path C554. The multiple flow paths D555 are connected only to one flow path C554. The length of one flow path C554 is longer than the length of the other flow path C554. In the flow path substrate 5A of this embodiment, it is also possible to facilitate the flow of the specimen into all the flow paths B552.

 以上、本開示に係る発明について、諸図面、及び、実施例に基づいて説明してきた。しかし、本開示に係る発明は上述した各実施形態に限定されるものではない。すなわち、本開示に係る発明は本開示で示した範囲で種々の変更が可能であり、異なる実施形態にそれぞれ開示された技術的手段を適宜組み合わせて得られる実施形態についても本開示に係る発明の技術的範囲に含まれる。つまり、当業者であれば本開示に基づき種々の変形又は修正を行うことが容易であることに注意されたい。また、これらの変形又は修正は本開示の範囲に含まれることに留意されたい。 The invention according to this disclosure has been described above based on the drawings and examples. However, the invention according to this disclosure is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments. In other words, the invention according to this disclosure can be modified in various ways within the scope of this disclosure, and embodiments obtained by appropriately combining the technical means disclosed in different embodiments are also included in the technical scope of the invention according to this disclosure. In other words, it should be noted that a person skilled in the art can easily make various modifications or corrections based on this disclosure. It should also be noted that these modifications or corrections are included in the scope of this disclosure.

 1 検出システム
 2 カートリッジ
 3 検出装置
 4,4A,4B 流路基板
 22 ボトル部(容器)
 41 受液部
 42 分岐流路(流路)
 45 流路(第1流路、第2流路)
 46 貯留部
 47 内部標準(標準部)
 101,1011~1014 第1試薬(検出試薬、第1検出試薬、第2検出試薬)
 102,1021~1024 第2試薬(検出試薬、第1検出試薬、第2検出試薬)
 420 フィルター部
 451 第1領域
 452 第2領域
 453 屈曲領域
 454 底部
 455 内壁
 D1 第1距離
 D2 第2距離
 1A,2A,3A,4A,5A 流路基板
 10 流路
 11 導入孔
 12 試薬溶解部
 13 検出部
 14 導出孔
 15A 分岐部
 151 流路A
 152,252,352A,452E,552 流路B
 153 第1分岐壁
 154,354 流路C
 155,255,455E,555 流路D
 157 第2分岐壁
 16 フィルター部

 
REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 1 Detection system 2 Cartridge 3 Detection device 4, 4A, 4B Flow path substrate 22 Bottle portion (container)
41 Liquid receiving portion 42 Branch flow path (flow path)
45 flow path (first flow path, second flow path)
46 Reservoir 47 Internal standard (standard part)
101, 1011 to 1014 First reagent (detection reagent, first detection reagent, second detection reagent)
102, 1021 to 1024 Second reagent (detection reagent, first detection reagent, second detection reagent)
420 Filter section 451 First region 452 Second region 453 Bending region 454 Bottom section 455 Inner wall D1 First distance D2 Second distance 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A Flow path substrate 10 Flow path 11 Inlet hole 12 Reagent dissolving section 13 Detection section 14 Outlet hole 15A Branch section 151 Flow path A
152, 252, 352A, 452E, 552 Flow path B
153 First branch wall 154, 354 Flow path C
155, 255, 455E, 555 Channel D
157 Second branch wall 16 Filter section

Claims (54)

 液体を受け入れる受液部と、
 前記受液部に接続する流路とを備え、
 前記流路は、プライマーを含む第1試薬が配置されている第1領域と、前記第1領域と異なる位置に核酸の増幅を行う酵素を含む第2試薬が配置されている第2領域とを有する、流路基板。
A liquid receiving portion for receiving liquid;
A flow path connected to the liquid receiving portion,
The flow path has a first region in which a first reagent containing a primer is disposed, and a second region in which a second reagent containing an enzyme that amplifies nucleic acid is disposed at a position different from the first region.
 前記第2領域は、前記第1領域が配置された位置に対して、前記受液部と反対側に配置されている、請求項1に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 1, wherein the second region is disposed on the opposite side of the liquid receiving portion with respect to the position where the first region is disposed.  前記流路は、前記第2領域の下流に、増幅された核酸を含む液体を貯留する貯留部をさらに備える、請求項1または2に記載の流路基板。 The flow channel substrate according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the flow channel further comprises a reservoir downstream of the second region for storing a liquid containing the amplified nucleic acid.  前記第1試薬は、複数の第1付着物として、前記第1領域に配置されている、請求項1から3の何れか1項に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the first reagent is disposed in the first region as a plurality of first attachments.  前記第1付着物の表面粗さは、前記流路の表面粗さと比較して、大きい、請求項4に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 4, wherein the surface roughness of the first attachment is greater than the surface roughness of the flow path.  前記複数の第1付着物は、皮膜として配置されている、請求項4または5に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 4 or 5, wherein the plurality of first attachments are arranged as a film.  前記複数の第1付着物は、一方向に並んでいる、請求項4から6の何れか1項に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to any one of claims 4 to 6, wherein the first attachments are arranged in one direction.  前記複数の第1付着物は、前記流路の内壁に接触しないように、前記流路の底部に配置されている、請求項4から7の何れか1項に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to any one of claims 4 to 7, wherein the first attachments are disposed at the bottom of the flow path so as not to contact the inner wall of the flow path.  前記第2試薬は、複数の第2付着物として、前記第2領域に配置されている、請求項1から8の何れか1項に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the second reagent is disposed in the second region as a plurality of second attachments.  前記第2付着物の表面粗さは、前記流路の表面粗さと比較して、大きい、請求項9に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 9, wherein the surface roughness of the second attachment is greater than the surface roughness of the flow path.  前記第2付着物は、皮膜として配置されている、請求項9または10に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 9 or 10, wherein the second attachment is disposed as a coating.  前記複数の第2付着物は、一方向に並んでいる、請求項9から11の何れか1項に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to any one of claims 9 to 11, wherein the second attachments are arranged in one direction.  前記複数の第2付着物は、前記流路の内壁に接触しないように、前記流路の底部に配置されている、請求項9から12の何れか1項に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to any one of claims 9 to 12, wherein the second attachments are disposed at the bottom of the flow path so as not to contact the inner wall of the flow path.  前記第2試薬は、複数の第2付着物として、前記第2領域に配置されており、
 前記第2付着物は、前記第1付着物よりも大きい、請求項4から8の何れか1項に記載の流路基板。
the second reagent is disposed in the second region as a plurality of second deposits;
The flow path substrate according to claim 4 , wherein the second attachment is larger than the first attachment.
 前記第1試薬は、複数の第1付着物として、前記第1領域に配置されており、
 前記第2付着物の表面粗さは、前記第1付着物の表面粗さと比較して、小さい、請求項9に記載の流路基板。
the first reagent is disposed on the first region as a plurality of first deposits;
The flow path substrate according to claim 9 , wherein a surface roughness of the second deposit is smaller than a surface roughness of the first deposit.
 前記流路には、増幅された核酸と特異的に結合する標識物質がさらに配置されている、請求項1から13の何れか1項に記載の流路基板。 The flow channel substrate according to any one of claims 1 to 13, further comprising a labeling substance disposed in the flow channel that specifically binds to the amplified nucleic acid.  前記標識物質は、前記第1領域の下流に配置されている、請求項16に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 16, wherein the labeling substance is disposed downstream of the first region.  前記第2試薬は、前記標識物質を含む、請求項16または17に記載の流路基板。 The flow channel substrate according to claim 16 or 17, wherein the second reagent includes the labeling substance.  前記標識物質は、モレキュラービーコンである、請求項16から18の何れか1項に記載の流路基板。 The flow channel substrate according to any one of claims 16 to 18, wherein the labeling substance is a molecular beacon.  請求項1から19の何れか1項に記載の流路基板と、
 液体を収容可能な容器と、を備える、カートリッジ。
A flow path substrate according to any one of claims 1 to 19;
A cartridge comprising: a container capable of containing a liquid.
 請求項20に記載のカートリッジと、
 前記流路内で増幅された核酸を検出する検出装置と、を備える、検出システム。
A cartridge according to claim 20;
a detection device for detecting amplified nucleic acid in the flow path.
 基板に対して、液体を受け入れる受液部、および、前記受液部に接続する流路を形成する形成工程と、
 前記流路に、プライマーを含む第1試薬を配置する第1配置工程と、
 前記流路の前記第1試薬を配置した位置と異なる位置に、核酸の増幅を行う酵素を含む第2試薬を配置する第2配置工程と、を含む、流路基板の製造方法。
A forming step of forming a liquid receiving portion for receiving a liquid and a flow path connected to the liquid receiving portion on the substrate;
a first disposing step of disposing a first reagent including a primer in the flow channel;
and a second placing step of placing a second reagent containing an enzyme for amplifying nucleic acid at a position in the flow channel different from the position at which the first reagent is placed.
 前記第1配置工程では、前記第1試薬を含む溶液を前記流路に塗布することにより、前記第1試薬を前記流路に配置し、
 前記第2配置工程では、前記第2試薬を含む溶液を前記流路に塗布することにより、前記第2試薬を前記流路に配置する、請求項22に記載の流路基板の製造方法。
In the first disposing step, a solution containing the first reagent is applied to the flow path to dispose the first reagent in the flow path;
The method for manufacturing a flow path substrate according to claim 22 , wherein in the second disposing step, the second reagent is disposed in the flow path by applying a solution containing the second reagent to the flow path.
 前記流路は複数の流路であり、
 前記複数の流路のそれぞれに接続する複数の貯留部をさらに備え、
 前記複数の流路は、
  検出対象物を検出する検出試薬である第1検出試薬の少なくとも一部が位置する第1流路と、
  前記第1検出試薬とは異なる検出対象物を検出する検出試薬である第2検出試薬の少なくとも一部が位置する第2流路と、を有する、請求項1に記載の流路基板。
The flow path is a plurality of flow paths,
Further comprising a plurality of reservoirs connected to the plurality of flow paths,
The plurality of flow paths include
a first flow path in which at least a portion of a first detection reagent that is a detection reagent for detecting a detection target is located;
The flow path substrate according to claim 1 , further comprising: a second flow path in which at least a portion of a second detection reagent that is a detection reagent for detecting a detection target different from the first detection reagent is located.
 前記流路は、検体と、前記検体に含まれる検出対象と反応する標識物質と、を含む混合流体が流れる流路であり、
 前記流路とは異なる領域に位置し、前記混合流体と比較する標準部をさらに備える、請求項1に記載の流路基板。
the flow path is a flow path through which a mixed fluid containing a specimen and a labeling substance that reacts with a detection target contained in the specimen flows;
The flow path substrate according to claim 1 , further comprising a standard portion located in an area different from the flow path and for comparing with the mixed fluid.
 前記流路は、液体が流れる複数の流路であって、
 前記複数の流路に接続する複数の貯留部と、を備え、
 前記複数の流路は、
  検出対象物を検出する検出試薬である第1検出試薬の少なくとも一部が位置する第1流路と、
  前記第1検出試薬とは異なる検出対象物を検出する検出試薬である第2検出試薬の少なくとも一部が位置する第2流路と、を有する、請求項1に記載の流路基板。
The flow path is a plurality of flow paths through which a liquid flows,
A plurality of reservoirs connected to the plurality of flow paths,
The plurality of flow paths include
a first flow path in which at least a portion of a first detection reagent that is a detection reagent for detecting a detection target is located;
The flow path substrate according to claim 1 , further comprising: a second flow path in which at least a portion of a second detection reagent that is a detection reagent for detecting a detection target different from the first detection reagent is located.
 前記複数の流路は、前記受液部、または、前記受液部に接続した流路から分岐している、請求項26に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 26, wherein the plurality of flow paths branch off from the liquid receiving section or a flow path connected to the liquid receiving section.  前記複数の流路の全ては、1つの前記受液部、または、前記1つの受液部に接続した流路から分岐している、請求項27に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 27, wherein all of the multiple flow paths branch off from one of the liquid receiving sections or from a flow path connected to the one liquid receiving section.  前記検出試薬は、前記複数の流路の分岐位置に対して、前記受液部の反対側に配置されている、請求項27に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 27, wherein the detection reagent is disposed on the opposite side of the liquid receiving portion with respect to the branching position of the plurality of flow paths.  前記検出試薬は、検出対象物に対応する配列を有するプライマーを含む、請求項26に記載の流路基板。 The flow channel substrate according to claim 26, wherein the detection reagent includes a primer having a sequence corresponding to the substance to be detected.  前記第2検出試薬は、前記第1検出試薬と配列の異なる前記プライマーを含む、請求項30に記載の流路基板。 The flow channel substrate according to claim 30, wherein the second detection reagent includes a primer having a different sequence from the first detection reagent.  前記複数の流路には、同一の試薬が配置されている、請求項26に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 26, wherein the same reagent is disposed in the multiple flow paths.  前記同一の試薬は、核酸の増幅を行う酵素を含む、請求項32に記載の流路基板。 The flow channel substrate according to claim 32, wherein the same reagent includes an enzyme that amplifies nucleic acid.  
 前記同一の試薬は、前記検出試薬が配置された流路において、前記受液部と反対側に位置している、請求項32に記載の流路基板。

The flow path substrate according to claim 32 , wherein the identical reagent is located on an opposite side to the liquid receiving section in the flow path in which the detection reagent is located.
 前記複数の流路のそれぞれにおいて、液体の送液方向に沿った前記検出試薬の、前記貯留部とは反対側の端から前記貯留部側の端までの前記複数の流路の長さは、互いに略同一である、請求項26に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 26, wherein the lengths of the detection reagent from the end opposite the reservoir to the end on the reservoir side along the liquid delivery direction of the detection reagent are substantially the same for each of the multiple flow paths.  流路幅が他の部分と比較して狭い部分であるフィルター部をさらに備え、
 前記フィルター部は、前記検出試薬の位置の前記貯留部とは反対側に位置している、請求項26に記載の流路基板。
The filter portion is a portion having a narrower flow path width than other portions,
The flow path substrate according to claim 26 , wherein the filter section is located on an opposite side of the storage section with respect to a position of the detection reagent.
 前記フィルター部は、前記複数の流路の分岐位置よりも上流に配置されている、請求項36に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 36, wherein the filter section is disposed upstream of a branching position of the plurality of flow paths.  前記複数の貯留部のうちの隣接する2つの貯留部の間の第1距離は、前記2つの貯留部のそれぞれに接続する2つの流路の間の第2距離よりも大きい、請求項26に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 26, wherein a first distance between two adjacent storage portions among the plurality of storage portions is greater than a second distance between two flow paths connected to each of the two storage portions.  前記複数の流路のそれぞれは、前記検出試薬の下流において複数の屈曲領域を有する、請求項26に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 26, wherein each of the multiple flow paths has multiple bend regions downstream of the detection reagent.  流路Aと、
 前記流路Aと重なる第1仮想直線と重ならない方向に前記流路Aから分岐した複数の流路Bと、
 前記複数の流路Bが分岐した領域に位置し、前記流路Bと連続する第1分岐壁と、を有し、
 前記流路Bは、それぞれの太さが、前記流路Aの太さよりも細くなっており、前記第1分岐壁は前記第1仮想直線と重なり、
 前記流路Aは、前記受液部に接続した流路であり、
 前記複数の流路Bは、前記複数の流路である、請求項27に記載の流路基板。
A flow path A;
A plurality of flow paths B branching off from the flow path A in a direction not overlapping a first virtual line overlapping the flow path A;
a first branch wall located in a region where the plurality of flow paths B branch off and continuous with the flow path B;
The flow paths B each have a smaller width than the flow path A, and the first branch wall overlaps with the first virtual line,
The flow path A is a flow path connected to the liquid receiving portion,
The flow path substrate according to claim 27 , wherein the plurality of flow paths B are the plurality of flow paths.
 前記複数の流路Bの太さの和は、前記流路Aの太さよりも小さい、請求項40に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 40, wherein the sum of the widths of the multiple flow paths B is smaller than the width of the flow path A.  前記複数の流路Bに対して前記流路Aと反対側に位置し、前記複数の流路Bのそれぞれから延びる複数の流路Cを更に有し、
 前記流路Cは、それぞれの太さが、前記流路Bの太さよりも太い、請求項40に記載の流路基板。
The liquid ejection device further includes a plurality of flow paths C located on the opposite side of the flow paths A with respect to the plurality of flow paths B and extending from each of the plurality of flow paths B,
The flow path substrate according to claim 40 , wherein each of the flow paths C is larger in width than each of the flow paths B.
 前記複数の流路Bの太さの和は、それぞれの前記流路Cの太さよりも大きい、請求項42に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 42, wherein the sum of the widths of the multiple flow paths B is greater than the width of each of the flow paths C.  前記複数の流路Cの太さの和は、前記流路Aの太さよりも小さい、請求項42に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 42, wherein the sum of the widths of the multiple flow paths C is smaller than the width of the flow path A.  前記流路Cと重なる第2仮想直線と重ならない方向に前記流路Cから分岐した複数の流路Dを更に有し、
 前記流路Dは、それぞれの太さが、前記流路Cの太さよりも細くなっているとともに、前記複数の流路Dが分岐した領域に位置する第2分岐壁が前記第2仮想直線と重なる、請求項42に記載の流路基板。
Further, a plurality of flow paths D branch off from the flow path C in a direction not overlapping with a second virtual line overlapping with the flow path C,
The flow path substrate according to claim 42 , wherein each of the flow paths D has a width smaller than a width of the flow path C, and a second branching wall located in the region where the multiple flow paths D branch off overlaps with the second virtual straight line.
 それぞれの前記流路Dの太さは、それぞれの前記流路Bの太さよりも細い、請求項45に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 45, wherein the width of each of the flow paths D is smaller than the width of each of the flow paths B.  前記複数の流路Dに対して前記流路Cの反対側に位置し、前記複数の流路Dのそれぞれから延びているとともに、流体に溶解させる試薬が位置する試薬溶解部を更に有する、請求項45に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 45, further comprising a reagent dissolving section located on the opposite side of the flow paths C with respect to the plurality of flow paths D, extending from each of the plurality of flow paths D, and in which a reagent to be dissolved in the fluid is located.  流体を貯留可能な複数の検出部を更に有し、
 前記複数の検出部のそれぞれは、前記流路Dに対して前記流路Cとは反対側に連通している、請求項45に記載の流路基板。
The liquid supply device further includes a plurality of detection units capable of storing a fluid,
The flow path substrate according to claim 45 , wherein each of the plurality of detection units is in communication with the flow path D on an opposite side to the flow path C.
 前記流路Bの長さ並びに前記流路Cの長さの和は、前記流路Aの長さの和、及び、前記流路Dの長さ並びに試薬溶解部の長さの和のそれぞれよりも小さい、請求項47に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate according to claim 47, wherein the sum of the length of flow path B and the length of flow path C is smaller than the sum of the length of flow path A and the sum of the length of flow path D and the length of the reagent dissolving section.  前記複数の流路Bは、前記流路Aから左右に分岐した2本の流路Bであり、
 前記複数の流路Dは、前記複数の流路Cから左右に分岐した4本の流路Dである、請求項45に記載の流路基板。
The plurality of flow paths B are two flow paths B branched to the left and right from the flow path A,
The flow path substrate according to claim 45 , wherein the plurality of flow paths D are four flow paths D branching off to the left and right from the plurality of flow paths C.
 前記2本の流路Bが成す角の角度を第1角度とし、
 前記4本の流路Dにおいて、隣り合った流路D同士が成す角のうち、一方の角である第2角の角度を第2角度、他方の角である第3角の角度を第3角度としたときに、
 前記第1角度は、前記第2角度及び前記第3角度よりも大きい、請求項50に記載の流路基板。
The angle between the two flow paths B is a first angle,
In the four flow paths D, when the angle of one of the angles formed by the adjacent flow paths D is defined as a second angle and the angle of the other angle is defined as a third angle,
The flow path substrate of claim 50 , wherein the first angle is greater than the second angle and the third angle.
 前記第2角度と前記第3角度の和は、前記第1角度よりも大きい、請求項51に記載の流路基板。 The flow path substrate of claim 51, wherein the sum of the second angle and the third angle is greater than the first angle.  前記第1角度は90度よりも大きく、
 前記第2角度及び前記第3角は90度よりも小さい、請求項51に記載の流路基板。
the first angle is greater than 90 degrees;
52. The flow path substrate of claim 51, wherein the second angle and the third angle are less than 90 degrees.
 前記複数の流路Bのそれぞれから分岐した複数の流路Dを更に有し、
 前記流路Dは、それぞれの太さが、前記流路Bの太さよりも細い、請求項40に記載の流路基板。
 
Further comprising a plurality of flow paths D branching off from each of the plurality of flow paths B,
The flow path substrate according to claim 40 , wherein each of the flow paths D is thinner than each of the flow paths B.
PCT/JP2024/027310 2023-09-29 2024-07-31 Flow path substrate, cartridge, detection system, and method for manufacturing flow path substrate Pending WO2025069702A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2023-170090 2023-09-29
JP2023170230 2023-09-29
JP2023-170230 2023-09-29
JPPCT/JP2023/035641 2023-09-29
PCT/JP2023/035641 WO2025069377A1 (en) 2023-09-29 2023-09-29 Channel substrate, cartridge, detection system, and method for manufacturing channel substrate
JP2023170090 2023-09-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025069702A1 true WO2025069702A1 (en) 2025-04-03

Family

ID=95203053

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2024/027310 Pending WO2025069702A1 (en) 2023-09-29 2024-07-31 Flow path substrate, cartridge, detection system, and method for manufacturing flow path substrate

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025069702A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2002022265A1 (en) * 2000-09-15 2002-03-21 Norchip A/S Microfabricated reaction chamber system
WO2013002354A1 (en) * 2011-06-29 2013-01-03 株式会社ダナフォーム Biological sample pretreatment method, method for detecting rna, and pretreatment kit
JP2017075807A (en) * 2015-10-13 2017-04-20 国立大学法人山梨大学 Microdevice and inspection apparatus having the same
JP2018007580A (en) * 2016-07-11 2018-01-18 東ソー株式会社 Method for amplifying nucleic acid in the presence of nonionic surfactant
WO2022025044A1 (en) * 2020-07-29 2022-02-03 京セラ株式会社 Flow path device

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2002022265A1 (en) * 2000-09-15 2002-03-21 Norchip A/S Microfabricated reaction chamber system
WO2013002354A1 (en) * 2011-06-29 2013-01-03 株式会社ダナフォーム Biological sample pretreatment method, method for detecting rna, and pretreatment kit
JP2017075807A (en) * 2015-10-13 2017-04-20 国立大学法人山梨大学 Microdevice and inspection apparatus having the same
JP2018007580A (en) * 2016-07-11 2018-01-18 東ソー株式会社 Method for amplifying nucleic acid in the presence of nonionic surfactant
WO2022025044A1 (en) * 2020-07-29 2022-02-03 京セラ株式会社 Flow path device

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP4912517B2 (en) Devices and methods for detection of multiple analytes
JP6181370B2 (en) Assay card for sample acquisition, processing and reaction
RU2739951C2 (en) Reaction vessel and a reaction apparatus for carrying out a polymerase chain reaction
ES2967462T3 (en) Method and system for the analysis and quantification of nucleic acid
US20100191482A1 (en) Microfluidic flow monitoring
US20090129198A1 (en) Intra-microchannel mixing method and apparatus
US8021843B2 (en) Biological sample reaction chip and biological sample reaction method
US9404152B2 (en) Microfluidic flow monitoring
JP2008151772A (en) Microfluidic chip temperature control method, sample analysis system, and microfluidic chip
US8637251B2 (en) Nucleic acid quantification method and microchip for nucleic acid amplification reaction
US12351866B2 (en) Nucleic acid amplification method
JP2008128906A (en) Microfluidic chip drive control method
US11608521B2 (en) Method of detecting genetic material in a biological sample and a device for its implementation
WO2025069702A1 (en) Flow path substrate, cartridge, detection system, and method for manufacturing flow path substrate
US20100240048A1 (en) Biological sample reaction chip, biological sample charging device, biological sample quantifying device, and biological sample reaction method
WO2025069377A1 (en) Channel substrate, cartridge, detection system, and method for manufacturing channel substrate
US10364460B2 (en) Reaction container, nucleic acid analysis device, and nucleic acid analysis method
CN111819276B (en) Reaction treatment device
WO2025069701A1 (en) Channel substrate, cartridge, determination system, and determination method
US8293521B2 (en) Method of dispensing nonvolatile liquid in reaction vessel and reaction vessel processing apparatus
JP2022022041A (en) Nucleic acid amplification method
US20240307869A1 (en) Pcr module

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24871504

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1